Home
        4 - Siemens
         Contents
1.                        Print data records           Set up  edit and delete data records    Figure 7 7 Standard screens for data records    Recipes are combined into a recipe directory which can be used to indicate  them on the display  and to print and edit them  A recipe is located in the  recipe directory under its recipe number and its recipe title     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    1 21    Standard O I Functions    Transferring data The C7   OP offers a transfer screen for transferring data records from the  records C7 OP to the C7   CPU and back  Transfer a data record to the C7   CPU  when required by the C7   CPU     The data record in the C7   CPU can be overwritten by another data record  stored on the C7   OP     The active data record can also be transferred from the C7   CPU to the  C7    OP and stored on the C7   OP     Note    Only one recipe data record at a time can be active on the C7   CPU     Transmission of data records between C7   OP and C7   CPU is synchronized  to prevent uncontrolled overwriting     Direct indirect Transmission of data records between C7   OP and C7   CPU can be performed  transfer directly    or indirectly        Direct transmission     The variables of the data record are written directly to the defined addresses  of the PLC     Indirect transmission     The variables of the data record are stored in an intermediate storage location  on the C7   CPU     See chapter 9  for detailed information on the inter
2.           Values   Format   Address only for DB  Address no   Address type                            Figure 7 9 Representation of Address for the SIMATIC S7  Example  C7 624  2x40     AS Address The AS address is the MPI node address of the chosen CPU  This can be  adjusted     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 35    Standard O I Functions    Working with  FORCE VAR    Update Values    Terminate  Updating Process    7 36    Table 10 1 summarizes the operational possibilities during the display of  FORCE VAR     Table 7 9 Operational Possibilities    General  You acknowledge every input field by field by pressing E gt    ENTER  Position the cursor in the line using the keys  In the column with the addresses  scroll up and down using the keys    If the cursor is positioned in the address column  you can select the  data type to be displayed  DB  MW  EW  AW  Z  T  by pressing the  keys described above     If the cursor is positioned in the Format column  you can set the data  format to HEX  DEC  BIN  CHR  T or C  using the above mentioned  cursor keys     Enter here the number of the address to be displayed or modified and  its address  using the numeric keypad     The cursor can be horizontally offset within the lines and the fields  with values  10 lines can be occupied in total     The values of the selected addresses are displayed in the value fields in  a pre defined format     Insert a new variable line before the current line  The cursor must be  pos
3.         Send control jobs to the C7 OP       Synchronize data and time between the C7 CPU and the C7 OP      Evaluate coupling identifier       Recognize C7 OP startup in C7 CPU program       Evaluate C7 OP operation mode in C7 CPU program       Evaluate C7 OP   s ready bit in C7 CPU program    Figure 9 5 shows the layout of the interface area  You can define the interface  area in a data block or a marker area  The address of the interface area is to be  declared in the configuration  This is necessary so that the OP knows where to  put the data     The interface area is to be determined once per CPU     Interface area     Address   7    Control   checkback bits    Job area    Reserved    Coupling identifier    Reserved    Reserved    Scheduler    Figure 9 5 Layout of the Interface Area for the C7 CPU    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    9 13    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 6 1 Control and Checkback Bits    Introduction Three bytes are available in the interface area for the control and checkback  bits  Bytes n 0 and n 1 are used to coordinate between the C7 OP and the  C7 CPU  Byte n 3 is required for the transfer of data records and indirect  variables     Byte n 1 and n 2 are described below          Description of The structure of byte n 0 is shown below  The diagram is followed by a  byte n 0 description of the individual bits   Address  n 0         Scheduler   Time   Date   Bits 5 6 Date time 1   New  The tr
4.      Input delay  0 01 ms    The process interrupt response time is calculated from the sum of the times  below     Process interrupt response time    Zahlen wie dt    Dez punkte     This process interrupt response time elapses from the time a signal is present  at the digital input until the first instruction in OB 40 is processed     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    3 31    Control with the C7 CPU    3 6 4 Diagnostics Interrupt Response Time    Diagnostics The diagnostics interrupt response time is the time that elapses between the  Interrupt first occurrence of a diagnostics interrupt signal and the calling of the first  Response Time instruction in the diagnostics interrupt OB  OB 82      In general  higher   priority interrupts take precedence  That means the  diagnostics interrupt response time is increased by the program execution  time of the higher   priority interrupt OBs and interrupt OBs of the same  priority  which have not yet been processed     Calculation The diagnostics interrupt response time is calculated as follows     Diagnostics interrupt response time   Diagnostics interrupt response time of  the C7 CPU   diagnostics interrupt response time of the signal module     For C7  0 6 ms   C7 CPU The diagnostics interrupt response time of the C7 CPU 1s approximately 1 3  ms    Calculation 1 3ms   0 6ms   1 9ms  2 ms    Example    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 32 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3   Test and Referen
5.      Numerical Values    Entering  Numerical Values    Limit Values    Field with Decimal  Places    6 16    In fields that allow the operator to enter a purely numerical value  you enter  the numerical value character by character using the keypad on the system  keyboard     In numerical fields  the inputs are normally right justified  Digits that have  already been entered are moved to the left     If there is a value in the field already  it is cleared completely from the field  when the first character is entered     Exception  Input fields for set points in BIN format  for instance   when calling the PG functions STATUS FORCE VAR   are changed to left justified  When input begins  the old  value does not disappear from the display completely  but  its bit pattern is overwritten one character at a time    You move the cursor in this type of field by pressing the    arrow key  lt  and D with    the Shift key activated     As soon as you have started entering numbers  the relevant field cannot be  left until the entry is either confirmed or aborted     You can configure limit values for numerical input fields  In this type of  field  a limit value check takes place  this means the entered values are  applied only 1f they lie within the configured limits  If a value outside these  limits is entered  a system message is displayed and after it has been  canceled  the old value is restored in the field     If a numerical field has been configured with a certain number of decima
6.     Commissioning  Start Up     2 2 C  CPU Mode Selection and DI DO Status Display    System Function You can select the system function menu from all operational modes  From  Menu this menu  the following additional menus can be selected     e C7 CPU mode selection    RUN P  RUN  STOP  MRES    e DI DO status display    O    o  i  Selection of the You can select the menu by pressing the keys The Shift LED    System Function  Menu    that was lit after pressing Shift goes dark     The following menu is displayed           SIMATIC C7  SYSTEM FUNCTIONS          KEY DI DO          Faf  F2   F3   Fa   F5   Fe   F7   Fs    Figure 2 3 System Function Menu with Associated Function Keys    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    2 5    Commissioning  Start Up     Select Mode Menu    2 6       You select the C7 CPU Modes menu from the system function menu in the  following manner     e C7 623  by depressing the key Fs   or Fe    e C7 624  by depressing one of the keys FA   Ae    The following menu will be displayed  MODE  STOP is used as an  example      C7 623       A Current  MODE  STOP mode             RUNP RUN STOP MRES       Keys for se   lecting mode       C7 624    RUNP RUN STOP MRES       Fi   F2   ra   Fa   rs   re   Fz  FB    keys torse     lecting mode       Figure 2 4    C7 CPU Modes    Menu with Associated Function Keys    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Commissioning  Start Up     Select C7 CPU You select the individual C7 CPU mod
7.     Index    Error  communications   direct I O access  3 8  peripheral access   power supply  3 7  programming   time    Error reaction  OB   3 7    ESC function    Escape key  6 3                 Evaluating the screen number     Event  assignable   4 26  Event message  delete   number   overflow     paging through  7 10   texts   Event message buffer   deleting automatically   7 15            maximum length   maximum number        Event messages area  bit set  9 4   Events  parameterizable   process alarm    Extended character set         F    Fault messages   1 4   FB   FC     Fields    component of screen entry  7 21    setpoints     time     Fields for combinated input output     First value   First Last message  setting   6 23    Flash memo  er sed  load   FORCE VAR  motified     Forward counting   Frequency  clocks     Index 4    Frequency calculation  4 33   Frequency meter  parameter   Full print out  F716   Function calls assignment applies    global    local   Function keyboard  image   Function keyboard image   Function keys    LED    number   Functions  of OP  C 2    Hardcopy ke  6 4   Help key   6 4  Help LED  7 23    Highest MPI address     Hirarchy level     Increments   Information text   Information texts   Input  cancel   left justified   6 16  right justified   6 16  Input fields  componenet of screen entry  7 21  properties  7 22     Input range  special inputs   2    Input output fields   Inputs  3 4   Insert key    Integral functions     Interface param
8.     Parameters can be     Dynamic or     gt  Static     In contrast to static parameters  dynamic parameters of modules can be  changed during running operation by calling an SFC in the user program  for  example  limit values of an analog signal input module     In contrast to dynamic parameters  static parameters of modules cannot be  changed by means of the user program  but only via the STEP 7 tool  S7 Configuration  for example  input delay of a digital signal input module     A password with a defined password level is required for accessing a  protected function  The password level corresponds to the authorization level  allocated to the operator  At the configuring stage  the necessary password  level can be preset in the range from 0  lowest level  to 9  highest level          Programming Device        Programmable Controller    The process image is a component part of the     gt  System Memory of the C7  CPU  At the beginning of the cyclic program  the signal states of the input  modules are transferred to the process image input table  At the end of the  cyclic program  the process image output table is transferred to the output  modules as signal state     A process interrupt is triggered by interrupt generating modules as a result of  a certain event in the process  The process interrupt is signalled to the C7  CPU  Depending on the priority of the interrupt  the associated     gt   Organization Block is then processed     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000
9.     Parameters that determine the characteristics of the     gt  C7 CPU  and the I O functionality of the C7     Automatic printout of fault and event messages that can be deleted in the  event of a buffer overflow     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary 5    Glossary    Function    Function Block    H    Hardcopy    Information Text    Inquiry Function    Instance Data  Block    Interface   Multipoint    Interrupt    Glossary 6    In accordance with IEC 1131 3  a function  FC  is a     gt  Code Block without      Static Data  With a function  you can transfer parameters in the user  program  Functions are therefore suitable for programming frequently  recurring complex functions  for example  calculations     In accordance with IEC 1131 3  a function block  FB  is a     gt  Code Block  with     Static Data  With a function block  you can transfer parameters in the  user program  Function blocks are therefore suitable for programming  frequently recurring complex functions  for example  closed loop controls   operating mode selection     Output of the display contents to a printer     Supplementary  user configurable information on messages  displays  display  entries and selection fields     The inquiry functions of STEP 7 permit the display of status information on  the programming device via one or more C7 systems during the various  startup phases and during operation of a programmable controller     Each call of a function block in the STEP
10.    6 22  set print parameters   Priorities   Priority  display priority   process alarm   Pro tool   Process alarm  3 7  events   parameter block   3 14  priority  B 14   Process image  update   Process image table   Process states   Procress alarm  events   4 24  Program tools   Programming  error   Programming languages  1 ATE  porocolins 2  1 5    ProTool Lite  I         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Index    R    Range overshoot    Range undershoot    Reaction  to diagnostics messages   5 9    Ready bit  9 15    Real time clock   parameter block    Recipe  addressing    wr             definition     transfer data records  9  19  9 20   Reference functions    Relatively constant frequencies  resolution  4 35    Repeat function   6 3    Residual buffer area    Resolution  analog ranges    Response time   analog output   reduction    Response time  longest     Response time  shortest     Retentive aeras    Retentive areas  parameter block   3 13    Retentivity  B 13    Return destination  screen  7 18    Right justified input    RUN   7    Run time  er B system   3 26         Run time meter   RUNP     S7 counter   S7 timers     S7 configuration   Scan cycle  OB               Scheduler bits   Scheduler times   Schedulers  Acitvated  8 9  Changed  8 9    Deactivated   Functions   8 9  Schedulers time   8 9  Schedulers times        Index 7    Index    Screen    by directory    editing    large screens    print    selecting    with a controljob   Screen
11.    How to Clear the  C7 CPU    2 10    If you wish to achieve a neutral state of the C7  you must completely erase  the C7 CPU and possibly also the C7 OP     The C7 must be switched off  You follow the following procedure to  completely erase the C7 OP     1  Depress and hold the following keys simultaneously VZ D    2  Switch on the C7     After this operation  the C7 OP is cleared     After clearing the C7 OP  the following items remain   e C7 system functions menu    e C 7 OP mode selector MODE for loading the configuration    There are two methods of erasing the C7 CPU    e Erase with the system function C7 CPU Modes   e Erase with programming function  see programming device manual    The complete erasure using the programming device function is only possible  when the C7 CPU is in STOP mode    How you clear the C7 CPU with the help of the system function C7 CPU  Modes is described below     1  Switch on the C7 and wait until the start up tests have been completed   The standby message will be displayed     2  Select the system function menu by pressing the    O    a  SHIFT  keys HELP    The system function menu will be displayed     3  Select the C7 CPU Modes menu in the following manner     e C7 623  by pressing the key Ft   or Fe    e C7 624  by pressing one of the keys Ft   ee    The menu with the C7 CPU Mode RUNP  RUN  STOP  MRES will be  displayed     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Procedure in the  C7 CPU During  Memory Reset    What Rema
12.    Interrupt class of asynchronous  interrupts    Priority of possible OBs    B 5    System Status List in the C7 CPU    Table B 1 Sublists of the System Status list of the C7 CPU  Continued        Index     ID of the  Individual  Records of the  Sublist     SZL_ID    Sublist    Operating statuses of the C7 CPU    Information on all stored operating  status transitions    Information on the last executed  operating status transition    Information on the current operating  status    Information on the operating status  specified    Communication performance  parameters on the communications  type specified    Communications status information  on the communications type specified    Module status information of all  modules in the rack specified    Diagnostics buffer  All entered event information  The x latest information entries    Module rack and  slot number    Module diagnostics    Complete module dependent record of  the module diagnostics information    B 6    Record Contents   Sublist Excerpt     STOP status  STARTUP status  RUN status    Number of connections  baud rates  Test and startup parameters  Operator interface  parameters     Diagnostics functions and diagnostics  entries    Communications via global data   parameters     Operator interface  time specifications     Number and type of connections  Number of test jobs set up    Number of current cyclic operator  interface tasks    Protection levels of the C7 CPU  Diagnostics status data  Communications via glo
13.    SIEMENS    D   O  D  O   F      O   gt    a  D   gt   mt  wn    User Information    Introduction         Commissioning  Start Up     SIMATIC Control    Control with the C7 CPU  C7 623  C7 624 Control System Addressing  Parameter Assign     ment and Function of the C7 4  Input Output           Volume 2 Diagnostics  Working with C7    Operating and Monitoring    O     Manual Operating the C7  General     Standard O I Functions         Extended O I Functions    Data Areas for Communication  between the C7 OP and the 9  C7 CPU    Appendices    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU  system Status List in the B    O  i  O  U       C7 OP Functionality   Standard Screens Control Jobs  C    System Messages       SIMATIC C7 and S7 Reference    Siemens Worldwide         C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary  Index    Safety Guidelines    This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety  as well as to    protect the product and connected equipment  These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning  triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger     i Danger  not taken    a Warning  not taken   Caution    ZN    Note    indicates that death  severe personal injury or substantial property damage will resultif proper precautions are    indicates that death  severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are    indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions
14.    Seconds    Minutes    Parameter 3    Set date    Parameter 1    he  n          Weekday    Parameter 2   8 n 9  Month  Day    Parameter 3    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Ist language  2nd language  3rd language     BCD coded      0  59    0  59      BCD coded     1  Sunday  2  Monday    7  Saturday     1  12    1  31        C 9    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     16   Parameters for V 24 interface  Parameter 1 Value for parameter 2  Baud rate   O  baud  baud  baud  baud  baud  baud  Data bits   data bits    data bits  Stop bits stop bit    stop bits  Parity s even    odd   gt  none  TD OP address  1   30 2   Parameter 2 Interface parameters to be set  0  Baud rate  i Data bits  2 Stop bits  3  Parity  Parameter 3            NOre Or OFrR ON BWN F    1  Number of lines per page    21   Display mode for alarm messages  Parameter 1 0  First value  oldest message     1  Last value  newest message   22   Set display contrast  Parameter    Parameters 2  3    23   Set password level    19   Printer parameters  Parameter 1 Value for parameter 2  Number of characters per line  0  20 characters line  1  40 characters line  2  80 characters line  Number of lines per page  0  60 lines page  1  61 lines page  12  72 lines page  Parameter 2 Printer parameters to be set  0  Number of characters per line    Parameter 1 1  9  1   lowest password level   9   highest password le
15.    e System keypad  e Function keypad  e Soft keypad    System Keypad I the key block with the system keys is marked  The    functionality of the individual keys is explained in table 6 1     Table 6 1 Key Function    O Shift key By means of the shift key  you can activate the second   function of dual assignment keys   for example  the  shifting of numeric keys 1   6 for inserting characters  A F  The enabled SHIFT mode is indicated by a SHIFT  LED which lights up after you press the SHIFT Key   The secondary function of a dual assignment key can  then be called    Numeric keys   Input keys for numerical characters  0   9     0   In shift mode of keys 1   6    to Input keys for alphanumeric characters  A   F    The keys have a repeat function  When the keys are   3   pressed and held down  after a short time delay  the  input entry is repeated for as long as the key is pressed  down     Sign key Changes sign from    plus    to    minus     f         Directory key   Displays screen directory  seq Section 7 5   m In Shift Lock mode  Recipe directory    S  Acknowledge   Acknowledges alarm messages  Z  ACK    key The LED of the key is on when at least one  unacknowledged alarm message is present     7 Insert key Pressing the insert key inserts a blank at the current    INS cursor position  when alphanumeric values are being  entered  All subsequent characters are moved one  position to the right     Delete key The delete key deletes the character at the current  cursor position 
16.    sured values become 7FFF   and the counter values  become FFFF  FFFFFF      Refer to the grouping     External error    in Table 5 3    Refer to the grouping     External error    in Table 5 3    Diagnostics    The diagnostics messages listed in Table 5 4 refer to Table 5 3     Table 5 4 lists the diagnostics messages and also possible reactions of the    Possible Elimination    Assign parameters to module    See error under the grouping     module error     Table 5 3     See error under the grouping     Internal error     Table   KEIN MERKER     The error cannot be corrected  by the user    The module can only be  restarted after a reset on the  bus  Restart C7 CPU      The error cannot be corrected  by the user    The module can only be  restarted after a reset on the  bus  Restart C7 CPU  or the  analog I O must be recali   brated at the manufacturer   s  factory  equipment  exchange      Refer to the grouping     External error    in Table 5 3     Refer to the grouping     Channel    in Table 5 3        9 9    Diagnostics    Table 5 4    Reason for the  Diagnostics  Message    Wire break    Overflow    Underflow    Incorrect  Parameter    9 10    Source of Error    Precondition    The measurement range  0   20mA has been set for the  channel     If a wirebreak check has  been assigned  then the error  is identified by evaluation of  the input current of the ana   log input channel   lt 1 6mA      The error is identified after  the comparison of the mea   sured value  i
17.   0541  12 13 2 73  Fax  05 41  12 13 3 50    93053 Regensburg  AUT P S 12  Hr  Rewitzer  Hornstr  10          09 41  40 07 1 97  Fax  09 41  40 07 2 36    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    18069 Rostock  AUT  Fr  Langhammer  Industriestr  15       03 81  78 21 71  Fax  03 81  78 21 75    66111 Saarbr  cken  AUT  Hr  Muller  Martin Luther Str  25        06 81  3 86 22 89  Fax  0681  386 21 11    57072 Siegen  AUT P 11  Hr  Patz  Sandstr  42 48    T  02 71  23 02 2 40  Fax  02 71  23 02 2 38  70499 Stuttgart   AUT P 11  Hr  M  ller   Weissacherstr  11   T  07 11  1 37 26 44  Fax  07 11  1 37 29 46  54292 Trier    AUT VG 14 P  Hr  Baldauf  L  bstr  15         06 51  20 09 23  Fax  06 51  20 09 24  89079 Ulm    AUT ZR  Hr  Birk  Nikolaus Otto Str  4         07 31  94 50 3 28  Fax  07 31  94 50 3 34    97084 Wurzburg  AUT PIS 13  Hr  Vogt  Andreas Grieser Str  30    BW  09 31  61 01 4 59  Fax  09 31  61 01 5 42    42103 Wuppertal  siehe ZN 45128 Essen  AUT P 14  Hr  Klein  Kruppstr  16    T  02 01   Fax  0201     E 1    Siemens Worldwide    SIMATIC Contact in Europe    Belgien    1060 Bruessel   Siemens S A   VP4  Hr  Gmuer  Chaussee de Chaleroi 116      0032 iB 5 36 25 33   Fax 00 32  2  5 36 23 87    Bulgarien    1113 Sofia   Siemens AG  Fr  Kirova  Blvd  Dragan Zankov Nr  36  T 003 8  5 70 85 21  Fax 0 03 59  2  68 50 51    Danemark    2750 Ballerup   Siemens A S  IP  Hr  Hansen  Borupvang 3   T 0045 Maa  77 42 90  Fax 00 45  44  77 40 16    Finnland    02601 Esp
18.   510 This message is output if  Either set up the data block or change      The data block for the variable the configuration   does not exist in the recipe  or      The recipe data contains errors    511 The data record number in the PLC job or the function  key is invalid     512 This message indicates a PLC error  The variable which   Correct the configuration 1f necessary   is transferred with the message identifies the number of a  data block that is too short       520 Too many returns stored Go to message level  if necessary  by  pressing ESCAPE key       522 Screen cannot be selected due to inadequate storage 1  Delete unused fields from confi   space  Results in cold restart with memory optimization guration  2  Configure smaller screen  with  fewer fields  or partition screen      526 Loop through mode is set on C7 Change to Normal mode    536 Disturbance on link between OP and diskette drive  Check the physical connection       538 Job and operator access data record simultaneously  Repeat your input if it was not  executed     539 The data records stored in RAM for recipe no  x contain  errors  they have been deleted  Any data records stored in  flash memory are still valid     540 The maximum permissible number of data records in  memory has already been reached     541 to 550 The specified variable cannot be found in the controller    Check the configuration      551 Controller address cannot be found  _          C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C62
19.   Additional  Information Z3    Evaluation in    Application  Program    4 32    You can find the additional information broken down into bits in Figure 4 8     Byte 8  7654321 0     ol of ol of  1  1  14  1  1  1  1        1  when counter input 1  has triggered process alarm    1  when counter input 2  has triggered process alarm       1  when counter input 3  has triggered process alarm       Figure 4 8 Layout of Additional Information Z3 in Declaration Section of OB 40    Additional information Z3 is not used and is set to 01104     The evaluation of process alarms in the application program is described in  the Manual  280      C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 6 Frequency Counters    Overview    Application    Frequency  Calculation    Measurement  Period    Example of  Frequency  Calculation    The universal input 3  assigned as frequency meter  provides you with the  possibility to continuously count identical edges within a selected time  period for a frequency  lt  10 kHz     Calculation of high frequencies     The frequency meter calculates the frequency value from the measured value  and the measurement period     he signal to be measured is to be connected to the universal input 3  see    Chapter 4 4  1 and of the C7  The frequency counter counts the rising    edges of the signal to be measured within a time period that can be assigned  using parameters     From this 
20.   Dep  Energia e  Industria  Hr  Eng  C  Pelicano  Estrada Nacional 117 ao   km 2 6 Alfragide  Apartado 60300  B 00351  1  417 8503  Fax 0 03 51  1  4 17 80 71    4450 Matosinhos Porto _  Siemens S A   Dep  Energia e  Industria  Hr  Eng  A  Amaral   Estrada Nacional 107    No  3570 Freixieiro  Apartado 5145  BW 00351 5  8 80 111  Fax 0 03 51  2  9 99 20 01    Rumanien    76640 Bucuresti   Siemens  Birou de consultatii  tehnice  Hr  Fritsch   Str  Zarii No  12  sector 5        00 40  1  2 23 47 95  Fax 00 40  1  2 23 45 69    5  Av  des Baumettes  Case postale 1 53   T 0041 REE 83 09  Fax 00 41  21  6 31 84 48    8047 Z  rich   Siemens Albis AG  VHR 3    Hr  Engel  Freilagerstra  e 28 40  T 0041 mi 5 58 82   Fax 00 41  1  4 95 31 85    Slowakische Republik    81261 Bratislava   Siemens AG  Hr  Sykorcin   Tovarenska 11  T 00 42  7  Fax 00 42  7    31 21 74  31 63 32    Slowenien    61000 Ljubljana  Siemens Slovenija  Hr  Lavric  Dunajska C47   1 32 60 68    T 6 03 86 eN  Fax 0 03 86  61  1 32 42 81    Spanien    48011 Bilbao  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Tapia  Maximo Aguirre  18   T 0034 2 4 27 64 33   Fax 00 34  4  4 27 82 39    08940 Cornella de Llobregat   Barcelona   Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Ortiz  Joan Fernandez Vallhonrat  1  B 0034  3  4 74 22 12   Fax 00 34  3  4 74 42 34    33206 Gijon  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Huchet    Corrida  1  35 08 00    B 0034 ER  Fax 00 34  85  34 93 10    15005 La Coruna l  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Pereira  Linares Rivas  12 14   B 0034 ER 12 07
21.   General     6 2 Operating Levels    Overview    Message Level    Screen Level    Changing  Operating Levels    6 6    When operating the C7  you have to distinguish between two distinct  operating levels  between which you can switch     e Message level  At the message level  current messages are displayed   e Screen level    At the screen level  functions are chosen  serviced and executed     The message level is the highest level on the C7  At message level  waiting  event messages  alarm messages and system messages are displayed  After  the C7 is up and running  it changes to message level and displays the     standby message              SIMATIC C7 Vx xx    C7 623                      Figure 6 3 C7 623 Standby Message  Operating Message No  0     The screen level is reached by pressing the ENTER key  The first screen to  be called is the    start    screen  From the start screen  you can branch to other  screens  depending on the configuration  On the screens  you can view  current process values  enter values and initiate functions by means of soft  keys     The linking of individual screens is referred to as a    screen hierarchy     If you  go to the bottom of the screen hierarchy  you go back one stage by pressing  the ESC key  You can step right back to the start screen if you wish  From  here you can return to the message level by pressing the ESC key  You can  also return directly to the message level from a screen  depending on the  configuration     You can ch
22.   Representation of The digitized analog value is the same for input and output values of the  Analog Values same nominal range     The representation of analog values is performed as a two   s complement    Table 4 6 illustrates the representation of the analog I O     Table 4 6 Representation of Analog Values    Bitnumber J15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0    Weighting of the bits VZ 214 213 212 gil 210 29 28  27 26 25 2 2 2 2d 20       Sign Conventions The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15   e    o    sy    e S       Resolution 12 Bit The resolution is 12 bit  The analog value is entered into the ACCU left    justified  The unoccupied low significance places are written with    0        Table 4 7 contains an example of a bit pattern showing how the  unoccupied places for 12 bit resolution are filled with    0        Table 4 7 Bit Pattern of a 12 bit Analog Value  Example     12 bit analog value  incl  0 l 0 0 0 1 l 0   0 l  sign        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 A 11    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 4 Representation of Analog Values for the Measurement Ranges of  the Analog Inputs    Overview The tables in this chapter contain the digitized analog values for the  measurement ranges of the analog inputs     In Table 4 8  you will find the representation of the binary analog values and  the associated decimal or hexadecimal representation of the units of the  analog value
23.   accept any more messages  those which have been acknowledged and have  departed are the first to be deleted automatically until such time as the  configured residual buffer size is reached     If this does not free up the residual buffer  as many of the oldest event  messages are deleted as necessary to reestablish the configured residual  buffer size  This deleting process is independent of the message priorities     If the residual buffer is still not available  as many of the older quened event  messages are deleted as necessary to restore the residual buffer size     If    overflow logging    has been configured  and an operational printer is  connected to the C7  a compulsory print out of all the deleted messages is  forced     If the system message buffer is completely full  the oldest message is deleted   automatically from the buffer when another system message occurs  There is   no overflow warning or forced print out of the deleted message  as is the case  of event and alarm messages     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    7 15    Standard O I Functions    7 1 7 Printing Messages    Overview    Direct Message  Logging    Switching On Off  Message Logging    7 16    You can print alarm and event messages by one of the following methods   e Direct message logging  e Full print out of the message buffer    e Forced print out upon buffer overflow  see page 7 13    Automatic Deletion        Event and alarm messages can be printed upon arrival and 
24.   arriving  departing  2  acknowledged  in the order of their occurrence    Event Msg Number Display messages in the buffer  differentiating between    All Messages    and  Pending Messages       Delete all acknowledged and departed messages in the event message buffer 6  Switch on off system messages at overflow of event message buffer  Event Msg Display all event messages    Ez  Sem   Operation  Set C7 OP operon modes onlin oe rase SO  System Define whether the oldest  first  or most recent  last  message is to be   displayed when several alarm messages are pending   Siem  Siem Mie  pin sem mesage bu      Date time Set date and time       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Overview of Standard Screens  Continued     Level 1 Level 2 Function Password  Level  System IF  Set interface parameters  V 24   IF2 Set interface parameters  MPI   STATUS Display S7 operands  VAR    MODIFY Display and modify S7 operands  VAR    User login via password input  User logout and branch back to the message level    Password Edit e Display password list  e Assign and change passwords and password levels     Delete passwords       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 5    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    C 3 Control Jobs and Their Parameters    Overview Control jobs can be used to trigger functions from the user program in the C7  OP  Exam
25.   cycle time of the analog input    For analog outputs  response time of the analog output    3 23    Control with the C7 CPU    Longest Response Figure 3 4 describes the cirumstances under which the longest possible  Time response time has to be taken into account     The state of the observed input changes  while it is being read by the PII  The change  to the input signal will not appear in the PII     Operating  system    The change to the input signal is written into  the PIl      ab          _        ie    Cc   O   Q   V        am    Operating  system    The change to the input signal will be  processed by the user program here     The response of the user program to the  change of the input signal will be transferred  to the outputs here     Operating  system    Figure 3 4 Longest Response Time       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  3 24 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    Calculation The  longest  possible response time can be calculated as follows     2 X process input image transfer time    2 X process output image transfer time    2 X operating system run time     2 x program processing time    Processing time for S7 timers      Input and output delays    The input delays are not marked in the diagram  Depending on the module   however  you have to take into account the following delay times     For digital inputs  input delay times  For digital outputs  negligible delay times  For analog inputs  cycle time of the analog input    For analog outputs 
26.   input field     infBection 64  the required changes as described   The cursor is positioned at the  in Section 6 4  Bection 6 4  6 4  end of the input field   After confirming your input  position the   The cursor is positioned at the    cursor to make further changes if end of the input field   applicable     5  End the editing procedure with 2 You change back to the previous  ESC level     Print Screen To print a screen to a connected printer  please proceed as follows        Select the screen to be printed via the The screen contents directory is   standard screen SCREENS     PRINT    displayed  but not when choice is  the function key or a control job   in these cases  the corresponding  screens are printed immediately      Scroll with the keys or The required screen title is dis   played     to the required screen number   or  if configured  to the screen title     Send the screen to the e by pressing   The selected screen is sent to the  printer     m Finish the action  B You change back to the previous  level        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  1 20 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Screen Entries    Components of a  Screen Entry    Updating Values  for Large Screens    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    Screens consist of entries  Precisely one entry is displayed per page on the  C7  irrespective of the configured number of lines  Lines which may have not  been fully configured are displayed as blank lines     An example of 
27.   then the stored  parameters will be loaded with the exception of the MPI parameter  If no  SDBO is present in the flash memory  then the standard parameters of  SDB2 will be set     Caution    After the last storage of the program in the flash memory of the C7 CPU   STEP 7     Copy RAM to ROM      the set parameters will be lost after the  next erase  with exception of the MPI parameters     3 9    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 1 Parameter Block    Clock Memory       Definition  Clock Clock memories are memories which periodically change their binary states   Memory at fixed frequency in a pulse pause ratio 1 1  Eight fixed frequencies are  defined for C7  which can be allocated to any arbitrary memory byte  The  period times can be found in Table 3 1     Clock Period Figure 3 1 shows the period times and the corresponding clock frequencies  Times generated by the    clock memory byte        Clock memory byte Period time and corresponding frequency    Bt 76543210    0 1 seconds corresponding to 10 Hz    0 2 seconds corresponding to 5 Hz  lamp flicker   0 4 seconds corresponding to 2 5 Hz  fast lamp flash   0 5 seconds corresponding to 2 Hz  0 8 seconds corresponding to 1 25 Hz  lamp flash   1 0 seconds corresponding to 1 Hz  1 6 seconds corresponding to 0 625 Hz  slow lamp flash   2 seconds corresponding to 0 5 Hz       Figure 3 1 Clock Period Times in    Clock Memory Byte       Parameter Block Table 3 6 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Clock memory         C
28.  01    Diagnostics  Information  I O     Read Diagnostics  Messages    Diagnostics    In the diagnostics information  we differentiate between permanent and  temporary diagnostics errors     e Permanent diagnostics errors cannot be influenced by the application  program and can only be removed by resetting the C7 CPU  complete  erase   restart  or equipment exchange  after a fault      e Temporary diagnostics errors disappear automatically after a renewed  measurement  ADC error  overrange or underrange error   can be  removed by the application program  perhaps by parameter assignment  during the process operations via SFC55  or by means of a manual entry  at the connectors  correction of the wiring      Diagnostics messages will be entered into the diagnostics buffer only if the  diagnostics alarm OB  OB82  occurs  The precondition is that the parameter     diagnostics alarm enable   yes    was assigned  Then you can read out the  detailed diagnostics messages in addition to the standard diagnostics  information using the STEP 7 Tool    S7 Info     see Manual  231    No entry is  made to the diagnostics buffer of the C7 CPU in all other cases  The  diagnostics message cannot therefore be read out     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    5 3    Diagnostics    5 2 Diagnostics Data of the C7 Analog I O and Universal Inputs    Overview    Analog Input  Diagnostics    Analog Output  Diagnostics    Layout of  Diagnostics Area  of the Module    5 4    This sec
29.  01    Operating the C7  General     3  3  3    EES o    Setting C7 System Parameters and Language      Changing Parameters On line  2    3  66  RaswordProwaion E  3  3       Note    The explanations in this chapter relate to the so called    Standard screens     which are supplied in an standard configuration with the configuration tools  ProTool and ProTool Lite  The special screens are called up in the standard  screens  The standard screen may be redesigned for a customized operator  interface  However  the special screens are stored permanently in the C7  firmware and can therefore not be modified     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 1    Operating the C7  General     6 1 Keyboard    The C7 623 and C7 624 key layout is ergonomically tailored to the various    Keyboard Layout  requirements of the device operating modes  by means of its arrangement and    colored layout     SIMATIC C7 623                         Soft k    i r2 Bra E    SF m DC5V    RUN  BAF m  FRCE mm STOP    LED    Function keypad       System keypad    Figure 6 1 C7 623 with Keyboard and Display    SIMATIC C7 624  All other keys are    identical to C7 623    Fa a a a a o irr re    C7 624 with Keyboard and Display       Figure 6 2    Key Labeling and The C7 is operated by means of a keyboard  The keyboard is categorized into    Key Functions    C7   623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    6 2    Operating the C7  General     three functional blocks  see  Figure 6 1  
30.  12  Fr  Schlupmann  Schweriner Str  1        05 21  291 5 21  Fax  05 21  291 5 90    38126 Braunschweig  AUT P 11  Hr  Pelka  Ackerstr  20    T  05 31   Fax    28195 Bremen  AUT P 12  Fr  Ulbrich  Contrescarpe 72    B   0421  3 64 24 27  Fax  0421  3 64 28 42    09114 Chemnitz  AUT P 11  Fr  Aurich  Bornaer Str  205    T   0371 4  Fax  0371  4    35 10  35 25    NN    5   5     ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    01189 Dresden  AUT 1  Hr  Lehmann  Karlsruher Str  111    BW  0351  40 22 2 77  Fax  03 51  40 22 2 74    40219 D  sseldorf  AUT P 15  Hr  Becker    Lahnweg 10  T  02 11  3 99 16 64  Fax  02 11  3 99 18 48    99097 Erfurt  AUT P 22  Hr  Skudelny  Haarbergstr  47    T  0361  4 25 23 51  Fax  03 61  4 25 23 50    45128 Essen  AUT P 14  Hr  Klein  Kruppstr  16    T  02 01   Fax  02 01     6 24 28  6 23 31               8  8    60329 Frankfurt  AUT P 25  Hr  W  M  ller  R  delheimer Landstr  1 3    T  0 69  7 97 34 18  Fax  069  7 97 34 42    79104 Freiburg  AUT P  Hr  Thoma  Habsburgerstr  132       0761  27 12 2 38  Fax  07 61  27 12 4 46    20099 Hamburg  AUT 1  Hr  Rohde  Lindenplatz 2       040  28 89 30 03  Fax  0 40  28 89 32 09    30519 Laatzen  Hannover   AUT P 10  Fr  Hoffmann  Hildesheimer Str  7       05 11  8 77 23 19  Fax  05 11  877 27 39    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    74076 Heilbronn  AUT P S  Hr  Gaul  Neckarsulmer Str  59        07131  183 203  Fax  07131  183 3 20    76185 Ka
31.  2 52 39 16    Ukraine    252054 Kiew 54  Siemens Vertretung  AUT   Hr  Liebschner    Ul  Worowskowo 27   T 007 844  2 16 02 22  Fax 0 07  044  2 16 94 92    Ungarn    1036 Budapest   Siemens GmbH  AUT 1  Hr  Turi  Lajos utca 103   T 0036 M 269 7455   Fax 00 36  1  2 69 74 54    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    SIMATIC Contact Outside Europe       Afrika    Agypten    Zamalik EGY Cairo   ELETECH  AUT  Hr  W  Y  Graiss  6 Zarkaria Rizk    Street    P O B  90    T  20 3 3 42 03 71  Fax  20  2  3 42 03 76    Algerien    16035 Hydra Alger   Siemens  Bureau d Alger  Division   Energie  Hr  Bennour    ng rue Abri Areski   B P  112   213 3 60 40 88   Fax  213  2  60 65 98       Elfenbeink  ste    Abidjan 15 R  C   Siemens AG  SEMEN  Mr  Hellal   16 B P  1062   T  2 25  37  46 57   Fax  2 25  27  10 21    Libyen    Me ee He S P L A J    Siemens AG  Branch Libya   Hr  Wahab  Zat EL Imad   Building Tower No  5  Floor No  9  P O B  91 531  BW  218 R 4 15 34  Fax  218  21  4 79 40    Marokko    Casablanca 05   SETEL S A   AUT  Hr  El Bachiri   Immeuble Siemens    km 1  Route de Rabat    Ain Sebaa   BW  212  2  3510 25   Fax  212  2  3401 51    Namibia    Windhoek 9000   Siemens  ry    Ltd   Hr  Jurgen Hoff  9 Albert Wessels Street  Industries North  P O B  23125  T 1264 R 6 13 58 59   Fax  2 64  61  6 13 77    S  dafrika    RSA 2001 Braamfontein    Siemens Ltd   AUT  Hr  E  Hillermann  Siemens House SH 401   Corner Wolmarans  amp  Biccard  Streets  RO  Box 4583   2
32.  2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records  and the Requisite    Data Areas  Adressing  During configuration  the recipe is given a name and a number  Both the reci   Data areas pe name and the recipe number can be seen on the C7   OP     The data records you create on the C7   OP are similarly given a name and a  number     When a data record transfer is initiated from the C7   OP to the C7   CPU  the  recipe name and the data record number are transferred to the C7   CPU toge   ther with the data  For this  you have to create a data mailbox on the  C7 CPU  Use the same specifications as were set in the configuration under  Area Pointer  The values of the data record are written directly to the addres   ses on the C7   CPU     Data mailbox     1st word  2ndword  Reserved __        3rd word Reserved   4th word  5th word       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  9 20 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 7 3 Synchronization during Transfer     Normal Case    Transferring data The control and response bits in the interface area synchronize data record  records transfer  A transfer is normally initiated by an operator input on the C7   OP     Transfer C7   OP     gt  The following description shows the procedure by which the C7   OP sets syn     C7 CPU chronizing bits and the manner in which the C7   CPU program has to react to   initiated on them   C7 OP    Table 9 4 Procedure for Transmission    Erklarung    Bit 0 is checked by th
33.  20 75 20   Fax  61  3  4 20 75 00    Perth   Siemens Ltd   CS I A   Hr  A  Lostrom  153  Burswood Road   Victoria Park  W A  6100   T  61 3  3 62 01 42   Fax  61  9  3 62 01 47    Sydney  N S W  2064   Siemens Ltd  Sidney  Industrial  Automation  Hr  Stephen Coop   383 pels Hi me A Amon  T  61   Fax  61 5 4 36 6 DA    Neuseeland    Greenlane  Auckland 5  Siemens Ltd  Auckland Office   CS I A   Hr  A  Richmond   300 Great South Road   P O B 17 122   T  64 9  5 20 30 33   Fax  64  9  5 20 15 56    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 Glossary 1    Glossary    ACCU    Address    Analog I O    Area Pointer    Authorization  Input    B    Back to Normal    Backup Buffer    Baud Rate    C7 620    Glossary 2    The accumulators are registers in the     gt  C7 CPU and are a clipboard for  load  transfer and comparison  math and conversion operations     An address is the identifier for a specific operand or operand area   Examples  I 12 1  memory word MW 24  data block DB 3     The analog I O converts analog process values  e g  temperature  into  digital values that can be processed by the C7 CPU or converts digital  values into analog manipulated variables     The area pointer is necessary for exchanging data between the operator panel  section and the controller section of the C7  It includes information on the  location and size of data areas in the controller     External access point to super
34.  21  5 68 46 79    Philippinen    Metro Manila   Siemens Inc   Hr  B  Bonifacio   and  amp  4th FI   Sterling Centre Bldg    Esteban cor  de la Rosa   a Village  36 A 18 48 18   Fax  63  2  8 18 48 22       Saudi Arabien    Jeddah   21412   Arabia Electric Ltd  Service Center   Hr  Kobeissi  P  O B  4621   T  966 6 6 65 84 20   Fax  9 66  2  6 65 84 90    Singapur    Singapore 1334   Siemens  Pte  Ltd  Singapore  AUT   Hr  Ulf Bexell    2 2 Kallang Sector    65 8 41 35 28   Fax  65 8 41 35 29       Stidkorea    Seoul   Siemens Ltd   E A  Hr  Kang W  S   Asia Tower Building  9th Floor   726 an  dong  Kang nam ku   C P O  Box 3001       82  2  527 77 62   Fax  82  2  5 27 77 19    Taiwan    Taipei 106   Siemens Ltd   AUT 1  Hr  Gulden  6th FI   Cathy Life Insurance Bldg   296  Jen Ai Road  Sec  4   T  4886 3 3 25 48 38   Fax  8 86  2  7 05 49 75    Thailand    Bangkok 10110   Berli Jucker Co  Ltd   Hr  Narong  Berli Jucker House   99  Soi Rubia  Sukhumvit 42 Road  P O  Box 173 BMC  Bangkok 1000  T  66 3 3671111   Fax  66  2  3 67 10 00    Vietnam    Hanoi   Siemens AG  Representation Office  Hr  Nguyen Huang Giang   18  Phan BO Chau Street   T    84  4  25 6061   Fax  84  4  26 62 27       Australien    Australien    Adelaide   Siemens Ltd  Adelaide Office  CS I A    Hr  J  Weiss  315 Glen Osmond Road  Glenunga  S A  5064   T  6 9 3 79 66 66   Fax  61  8  3 79 08 99    Melbourne    Siemens Ltd   CS I A   Hr  N  Gilholm   544 Church Street   Richmond  Victoria 3121   T  61  3  4
35.  3 Performance Characteristics of the C7 CPU                  00 000 0e    3 4 Or OPU BICCKS cataeiaiaaronn sade venue ees EEEE ERES  3 5 OG7 GPU ParameleiS een cee es vod ae aatne bones boats Peat eae EESE  3 5 1 Parameter Block    Clock Memory                2 00 cece eee cence eens  3 5 2 Parameter Block    Start Up Characteristics              0 0 0    cece eee   3 0 0 Parameter Block    System Diagnostics                   ccc cee eee eens  3 5 4 Parameter Block    Retentive Areas           0 0    ccc eee  3 5 5 Parameter Block    Process Alarms                 00 cece eee eee nena  3 5 6 Parameter Block    Real Time Clock               0    cece eee ees  3 5   Parameter Block    Time of Day Alarms                 0 000 e eee eee nee  3 5 8 Parameter Block    Watchdog Alarms                 00 cece ee eee eens  3 5 9 Parameter Block    Cycle Behavior                 000 cc cece eee eens  3 5 10 Parameter Block    MPI Addresses                   00000 cece eee eens  3 6 Calculation of the Scan Cycle Time and Response Time of the C7 CPU    3 6 1 Calculation Example for the Cycle Time             0 00 0  cece eee eee  3 6 2 Calculation Example for the Response Time                  2000 000  3 6 3 Process Interrupt Response Time            0    0c cece eee  3 6 4 Diagnostics Interrupt Response Time            nananana annann  3 7 Test and Reference Data Functions of the C7 CPU                      3 8 Load Erase C7 CPU Flash Memory               000 cece ence ee eee    4 Ad
36.  51   Fax 00 34  81  12 03 60    30008 Murcia    Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Martinez    Marques de los Velez  13  B 0034  a  23 36 62  Fax 00 34  68  23 52 36    41092 Sevilla  Siemens S A   AUT 1   Hr  de la Fuente  ISLA DE LA CARTUJA  Paseo de la Acacias  s n  Edificio Siemens   r 0034  2 4 46 30 00  Fax 00 34  5  4 46 30 46    28760 Tres Cantos  Madrid   Siemens S A   AUT 1    Hr  Olaguibel  Ronda de Europa  5  T 0034 M 8 03 12 00   Fax 00 34  1  8 03 22 71    46021 Valencia   Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Albors  Avda  Aragon  30  Ed  Europa   B 0034 B 3 69 94 00   Fax 00 34  6  3 62 61 19    36204 Vigo l  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Garrido  Pizarro  29   B 0034  Ba  41 60 33   Fax 00 34  86  41 84 64    50012 Zaragoza   Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Aliaga  Avda  Alcalde Gomez Laguna  9  T 0034 78  35 61 50   Fax 00 34  76  56 68 86    Tschechien    60200 Brno   Siemens AG  Kancelar Brno   Hr  Tucek  Vinarska 6   B 0042  2 43 21 17 49  Fax 00 42  5  43 21 19 86    14000 Praha 4 l  Siemens AG  Zastoupeni v CR   Hr  Skop  Na strzi 40   T 00 42  2  61 21 50 336  Fax 00 42  2  61 21 51 46    80040 Findliki lstanbul l  SIMKO A S   AUT ASI 1  Fr  Yargic  Meclisi Mebusan Cad  125      0090 g 25 10 90 01 706  Fax 00 90  1  25 10 90 07 09    T  rkei    06680 Ankara Kavaklidere  SIMKO ANKARA  Hr  Ensert   Atat  rk Bulvari No  169 6      0090  812  418 22 05    80040 Findikli Istanbul  SIMKO TIC  ve SAN  A  S  AUT 1  Fr  Yargic    Meclisi Mebusan Cad  No 125     0090 613 2511706  Fax 00 90  212 
37.  7 0    If the first word of the job area is not equal to zero  the C7 OP evaluates the  control job  After that  the C7 OP sets this data word to zero  For this reason   the parameters must first be entered in the job area and only then the job  number         The possible control jobs are listed with job numbers and parameters in  Appendix 2     Coupling identifier Byte n 13   The C7 OP enters the coupling identifier in byte 13     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  9 16 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Date and Time    Scheduler bits   C7   624 only     Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    Time   byte n 15 to n 17   Date   byte n 21 to n 24   The date and time can be transferred from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU via  control job 41     The following screens show the layout of the data area  All inputs are coded  in Binary Coded Decimal  BCD      Time     Address    7 0    Date        Address    7 0        Byte n 26 to n 31   A scheduler time is a periodically recurring point in time  hourly  daily  wee   kly  annually  at which a predefined function is executed     for example     e print message buffer or screen  e select screen     When a scheduler time is reached on the C7   OP  the corresponding bit is set  in this area     Address       Scheduler No     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 6 3 Example for activating a control job    Control Job Procedure for the activati
38.  7 user program is assigned a data  block which is generated automatically  In the instance data block  the values  of the input  output and in out parameters  as well as the module local data  are stored         gt  MPI    The     Operating System of the C7 CPU has 10 different priority classes  which control execution of the user program  These priority classes include  interrupts  as for example  process interrupts  When an interrupt occurs  the  operating system automatically calls a corresponding organization block  where the user can program the reaction desired  for example  in an FB      C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    LAN    Load Memory    Memory Marker  Bits    Memory Reset    Message Level    Message Logging    Module  Parameters    Glossary    A local area network is a bus type transmission medium which interconnects  several nodes  Data transmission can be serial or parallel over electrical  conductors or fiber optic cables     The load memory is part of the C7 CPU  It contains objects generated by the  programming device  It is available as a permanently integrated memory     Memory marker bits are a component part of the     gt  System Memory of the  CPU  which are used to store intermediate results  They can be accessed bit  by bit  byte by byte  word by word or double word by double word     During a memory reset of the     C7 CPU  the following memories are  cleared     e The     Work Memory   e The write read area of the     gt  Load
39.  Area message at the C7 OP it self  or if the acknowledgement should be given by  the C7 CPU  the corresponding acknowledgement areas are to be configured  in the C7 CPU     e Acknowledgement area C7 OP     C7 CPU   The control is informed when an alarm message is acknowledged by an  operation at the OP    e Acknowledgement area C7 CPU     C7 OP   The alarm message is acknowledged via the C7 CPU     These acknowledgement areas are to be allocated in the configuration     when using ProTool and ProTool Lite  under    area pointers        Figure 9 2 shows schematically the individual alarm message and  acknowledgement areas  The acknowledgement procedure is detailed in  Table 9 4     Alarm message area    Internal processing    linking    acknowledgement aree  C7 OP     C7 CPU    Figure 9 2 Alarm Message and Acknowledgement Areas       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 5    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    Table 9 3 Alarm Message Acknowledgement Procedure    O m     e   e    Set alarm message bit in Appropriate acknowledge   Alarm message has arrived  C7 CPU bit C7 OP     C7 CPU is and is unacknowledged  reset    Set acknowledge bit in Alarm message has been  C7 CPU 2  acknowledged    or Acknowledge bit C7 OP  Acknowledgement via a      C7 CPU is set  C7 OP operation     Reset alarm message bit in Alarm message has   C7 CPU departed  independent of  Acknowledgement  condition        1  If Acknowledgement is initiated via the 
40.  Chuk Hang Road   T  85 5  28 70 76 11   Fax  85  2  25 18 04 11    Indien    Bangalore 560 001   Siemens Ltd   BAN AUT MAP   Hr  B  Sunderram   Jyoti Mahal  3rd Floor   49  St  Marks Road  P O B  5212     91  80  221 21 01   Fax  91  80  2 21 24 18    Bombay 400 018   Siemens Ltd   AUT M AP    Hr  S  Mistry   Head Office B Building   130  Ganpat Jahav Marg  Worli  T  91 155  4 93 13 50 60  Fax  91  22  4 95 08 22    Calcutta 700 071   Siemens Ltd   CAL AUT MAP   Hr  D  K  Ganguli   6  Little Russel Street  P O B  715  GO  491 33 2 47 83 74  80  Fax  91  33  2 47 47 83    New Delhi 110 002   Siemens Ltd   DEL AUT MAP   Hr  R  Narayanan   4A  Ring Road  I P  Estate   P O B  7036    T  91 HEE 81 44  Fax  91  11  3 31 41 78  Indonesien    Jakarta 12870    Dian Graha Elektrika  Jakarta  Power    Eng   amp  Autom  Div   Hr  M  Zafrullah  JI  Gatot Subroto Kov  74 75   Mustika centre Building Floor 2a    P O  Box 4267   T  62 R 8 30 65 74   Fax  62  21  8 30 74 02    Iran    15914 Teheran  Siemens S S K   Hr  Din Payuh  Khiabane Ayatollah Taleghani 32    Siemenshouse  P O B  15875 4773  15    ran  T  98 ep 61 41  Fax  98  21  6 40 23 89    Japan    Tokyo 141 00  Siemens K K   ATT  Hr  Nakamichi  Siemens Fujikara Building  8F  11 20  Nishi Gotanda 2 c iome  am ao   1B   34 90 44 37  Pai 181 3  34 95 97 92    E 4    Pakistan    Karachi   74400   Siemens Pakistan Eng  Co  Ltd    Power Division  Hr  Ilyas  ILACO House   Abdullah Haroon Road   P O  Box 7158   T  92 R 51 60 61   Fax  92 
41.  Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Exceeding the The universal inputs frequency meter is designed for a maximum frequency  Threshold of 10 kHz   Frequency    A frequency filter is fitted to the input     a Warning  If the actual frequency exceeds the threshold frequency of 10 kHz  then the  correct function of the universal inputs can no longer be guaranteed  since  count pulses will be lost     Resolution of With relatively constant frequencies  the resolution of the measurement is   Measurement higher if you set a longer measurement period  Table 4 22 displays the  resulution of the measurement according to the configured measurement  period     Table 4 22 Resolution of the Measurement    Measurement Resolution Example of Frequency  Period Count Value During  Calculated   Measurement    Frequency can be calculated in P9000 9000 Hz  ls    10 Hz increments  Frequency can be calculated in   900    0Fz    1 Hz increments  Frequency can be calculated in     0    9    0 1 Hz increments       Disadvantage of The frequency meter calculates the frequency in longer intervals  This means  Long that with long measurement periods  an updated frequency value is more  Measurement seldom available  If the frequency continuously changes  then only average  Periods values are available    Disadvantage of Due to the principle of measurement  the measurement error increases with a  Short Frequency reduction in the m
42.  G7076 C624 01    Glossary 9    Glossary    Programmable  Controller    Programming  Device    RAM    Reference Data    Retentivity    S    Selection Field    SFB    SFC    Signal Module    Glossary 10    Programmable controllers  PLCs  are electronic control devices whose  functions are stored in the controller in the form of a program  The  configuration and wiring of a PLC therefore do not depend on the actual  functions of the control  Programmable controllers and computers have  similar structures  they consist of a CPU  central processing unit  with  memory  input output modules and an internal bus system  The I O and  programming language are tailored to the requirements of open loop control  technology     Programming devices are principally personal computers that are  industry standard  compact and transportable  They are characterized by a  special hardware and software for SIMATIC programmable controllers     A RAM  Random Access Memory  is a read write memory medium  Its  memory cells can be addressed directly and their contents changed  individually  RAMs are used as data and program memories     Reference data are used for verifying program execution in the C7 CPU   They comprise cross reference lists  pin assignment lists  program structure   list of unassigned addresses and list of missing identifiers  The STEP 7 User  Manual describes how these data can be read     Retentive data areas and retentive timers  counters and memory marker bits  retain their conte
43.  Inc   Central Region   Hr  Luther Crouthamel   4770 Duke Drive suite 381  T  1 iB 13 3 98 96 91  Fax  1  5 13  3 98 98 39    Mukilteo  WA 98275   SIA Inc   MidwWest Region    R Earl Haas  8412 54th Avenue  t    es  T  1 ARELES  Fax  1  7 14  5 57 90 61    Plymouth  MN 55442  SIA Inc   MidWest Region   Hr  Greg Jaster    13235 45th Avenue No   T 41 iF OB 6 40 15 95  Fax  1  7 08  6 40 80 26    Venezuela    1071 Caracas   Siemens S A   AUT ASI   Hr  Jesus Cavada   Avda  Don Diego Cisneros  phere wed Los Ruices   Ap  3616  Caracas 1010 A  7 Hee   5 83 8 6b  Fax  58  2  2 03 82 00       Asien    China    510064 Guangzhou   Siemens Ltd  China  suenazien  Office  Hr  Peter Che   Room 1134 1157 GARDEN Hotel  Garden Tower    368 Huanshi Dong Lu   T  86 An 3 85 46 88   Fax  86  20  3 34 74 54    100015 Peig   Siemens Ltd  China  Beijing Office   Hr  Wolfgan S  llner   T  ret honghuan Nan Lu  Chao istrict   P O  543   T  86 tO  4 36    18 88  Fax  86  10  4 36 32 13    200090 Shanghai  Siemens Ltd  China  Shanghai  Office  Hr  faa Cui   450  Lin Quin  39 54 10    T  86 EN  Fax  86  21  5 39 54 21    110001 Shenyang   Siemens Ltd  China  Shenyang  Office  Hr  Ren Qi  Sakei Torch  Building 23rd FI  262A Shifu Da Lu  Shen He District   T  86 R 2 79 02 87   Fax  86  24  2 79 02 86    E 3    Siemens Worldwide    SIMATIC Contact Outside Europe    Hongkong    Hong Kong   Siemens Ltd  Hang Kong A  R  O    Automation System     Division   Hr  Keiren Lake    7th Floor  Regency Centre    39 Wong
44.  Lite        3  As soon as the configuration has been loaded  the message mode is set  and the configured standby message is displayed     4  You can now change to the following levels     O    o  e C7 system function menu    e Screens  the configuration start screen     After a configuration has been loaded  this can be started by pressing the        key and the configured    Start    screen will be displayed  After this     operator actions are only possible in the sequence defined in the  configuration     If a configuration has been loaded  you can reload a new configuration only  after activation of the standard screen Load Mode or by means of the  configured function Change Mode  The modes On line  Off line  Transfer  can be selected from the standard screen  see Section KEIN MERKER   The  function Change Mode immediately activates the corresponding transfer  mode     If the standard screen or the above function is not available in the currently  loaded configuration  you must remove the loaded configuration via a    memory reset before reloading  Detailed descriptions of the Memory reset  function can be found in  Section 2 3     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    2 3    Commissioning  Start Up     Memory reset procedure     1  Switch off C7     2  Simultaneously depress and hold the keys VZ D    3  Switch on the C7     4  Further actions as described under    No configuration loaded        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  2 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01
45.  Manchester M20 2UR  Siemens PLC  Control Systems   Hr  Hardern  Sir William Siemens House   Princess Road   4 46 52 33    T 0044 81   Fax 00 44  61  4 46 52 32       0030 134  47 92 12    E 2    Irland    Dublin 11   Siemens Ltd   Power  amp  Automa   tion Division  Hr  Mulligan   8 11 Slaney Road   Dublin Industrial Estate   B 00353 HH  B30 37 Bt  Fax 0 03 53  1  8 30 31 51    Island    121 Reykjavik   Smith orland H F    Hr  Kjartansson    Noatuni 4  P O B  519   B 00354 th 62 83 00  Fax 0 03 54  1  62 83 40  Italien    40127 Bologna   Siemens S p A   AUT R10A    Hr  Tosatti   a GO 90 eh    38 45 09   Fax 00 39 R 24 32 13   Sere che AUT R10A  iemens S p A       Hr  Gaspari  Via della Volta  92        00 39  30  3 53 05 26   Fax 00 39  30  34 66 20    20124 Milano  Siemens S p A   AUT R10A     Osterreich    6901 Bregenz   Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Madlener  Josef Huter StraBe 6    Postfach 347   T 0043  39 r 41 92 72   Fax 00 43  55 74  41 92 88    8054 Graz  Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Jammernegg  Strassganger Stra  e 315  Postfach 39  2 80 42 80    T 00 43  3 16   Fax 00 43  3 16  2 80 42 85    6040 Innsbruck Neu Rum  Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Mayr  SiemensstraBe 24  Postf  9 04  T 0043 iP 13 23 12 60  Fax 00 43  5 12  23 15 30    9020 Klagenfurt   Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Weber  Werner von Siemens Park 1  T 0043 Zi 83  3 88 32 43  Fax 00 43  4 63  3 88 34 49    4020 Linz  Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Schmidt  Wolfgang Pauli StraBe 2  Posttach 563   3 33 02 95    T 0043 iS 35  Fax 00 43  7 32  3 33 0
46.  Memory   e The     System Memory   e The     Backup Buffer   The user program is reloaded from the flash memory    The following memories are cleared in a memory reset of the     gt  C7 OP   e The     Work Memory   e The     Configuration Memory     After this procedure the C7 OP no longer contains any user specific data     Operating level of the C7 at which any messages triggered in the system are  displayed     Printout of fault and event messages parallel to display output     Module parameters are used to set the module reactions  A difference is  made between static and dynamic module parameters     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary 7    Glossary    MPI    N    Nesting Depth    Network    Normal Operation    OB    OB Priority    Operating System  of the C7 CPU    Organization Block    Output Field    Glossary 8    The multipoint interface  MPI  is the SIMATIC S7 interface for  programming devices  It enables several nodes  programming devices  text  displays  operator panels  to be operated simultaneously at one or several  central processing units  The nodes with MPI interfaces are networked  Each  node is identified by an address  MPI address      A block can be called from another block by means of block calls  The  nesting depth is the number of simultaneously called     gt  Code Blocks     A network is a number of C7 systems and or S7 300 systems and further  terminals  such as programming devices via connecting cables for the  pur
47.  Message number   Message priority  7 9  Message text   displaying   Messages    chronicle   7 17   deleting    display priority    displaying    first    last   Mixed display variant  7 8  Mode selection   Mode menu  exit   MODIFY VAR   Modul time limit   Motified  FORCE VAR   MPI station addresses   MPI address  highest   MPI addresses   parameter block  3 19  MRES                          Index 5    Index    N  Nesting depth   3 4     Non serious  system messages  7 6   Normal message   Number   alarm message     event message   Numeric keys   Numerical values   6 16    O  OB  B 5  3 6    OB  I  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 10  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 100  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 121  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 122  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 20  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 35  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 40   Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 80  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 81  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 82  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 85  Startereignis in CPU 314    OB 87  Startereignis in CPU 314    Off line    On line    OP functions  overview    OP operation mode    OP restart    Operate the C7  what do you require    Operating informations                            Operating system test  start up   Operation modes   Operator functions   Operator interface functions   Option list   Organization block   Output  special inputs   4 21  Output field  component of screen entry   Output fields  properties   Output range   addresses    p
48.  Recipe number selected on the  OP     4   Figure 7 8 Transfer screen    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 31    Standard O I Functions    Specifying source  and destination    1 32    The data record numbers for the source data record and the destination data  record must be entered in the transfer screen     e The C7   CPU data record is always    0    for both directions of transfer   e The C7   OP data record must always be specified as a number  gt  0     Example of entering source and destination     C7   OP     C7 CPU Transfer  Source Destina    Description  tion  11 Source data record 11 is an existing data record on the C7   OP  and is to become the active data record on the C7   CPU  des   tination      C7   CPU     C7 OP Transfer    Source Destina    Description  tion    22 The source data record is the active data record on the  C7    CPU which is to appear on the C7   OP  destination  after  the transfer under data record number 22   If data record number 22 already exists  it can be overwritten  or not if requested     C7 OP     C7 OP Transfer  i e   copying     Source Destina    Description  tion  33 44 Source data record 33 is an already existing data record on the  C7 OP which is to be copied as data record 44   If data record number 44 already exists on the C7   OP  it can  be overwritten or not if requested     Note       Symbolic value entries in the input fields source and destination     The data record numbers from data records alre
49.  Start counter   Start screen   Start Up  configuration loaded             C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       State  universal input   Static  parameter   Static text  component of screen entry        STATUS VAR  C 5  STL   STOP  2 7   for C7 CPU  3 7  Stop counters   Substitute value  parameter block  4 10  Summary  message print   7 17   Super user     password   Symbolic values     System  C7 OP operation     interface parameters                  System keyboard image   System keypad   System message   display   7 6   hide   System message buffer    display   C 4   viewing   System messages    non serious    serious   System mode  key combination   System operating  functions keys  6 4  System parameters   System settings   6 19  System state list         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Index    T    Temporary  diagnostics error   5 3   Test functions   Threshold frequency    counter         Time alarm  4 18  Time error   Time of day alarm    Time of day alarms  parameter block   Time of day alarm    Timer    Times  B 4   Title  screen    Transfer  data records    Transfer screen   7 31    Type  of measurement     U    Universal input  addresses   Universal inputs  B 4    parameter block   Update time   User data area  optimization   User data areas  functionality   9 3  User rights   6 27     V    Values  input   6 15   VAR list    View  event messages   C 4  Viewing  event messages   Voltage measurement range    analog I 
50.  and  internal process image of the DO of the digital C7 I O and are displayed in  BIN format  It is not possible to alter the display     It is to be noted that in the STOP state of the C7 CPU  the real process state  is DO   0  however the last value set by the program will be displayed     The selection of the DI DO status display does not require a password level   The function can be selected from the System Functions menu     e C7 623  by pressing the Fs   or keys  e C7 624  by pressing one of the keys or    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Commissioning  Start Up     The following data will be displayed        DI 11101110  10101010  DO 11101110  10101010                Figure 2 5 DI DO Status Display on a C7 623    Table 2 2 Explanation of the DI DO Status Display in Figure KEIN MERKER    Explanation     Signal state of the DI DO    e 1DI DO set  e 0 DI DO reset       Pin numbers from   to    Note    The values of the DI DO are read and displayed every 400 ms  Any signal  changes occurring between two scan points are not indicated     Zz  Exit the DI DO You exit the DI DO status display by pressing the key   Display  Zz  Exit the System You exit the System Functions Menu by pressing the key     Functions Menu    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 2 9    Commissioning  Start Up     2 3 Memory Reset of the C7    Overview    C7 OP Memory  Reset    What Remains  after a Memory  Reset of the  C7 OP        Memory Reset of  the C7 CPU 
51.  are not taken     draws yourattention to particularly importantinformation on the product  handling the product  orto a particular    part of the documentation     Qualified Personnel    The device system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual     Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment  Qualified persons are  defined as persons who are authorized to commission  to ground  and to tag circuits  equipment  and sys   tems in accordance with established safety practices and standards     Correct Usage    ZN    Note the following     Warning    This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical    description  and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been  approved or recommended by Siemens     This productcan only function correctly and safely if itis transported  stored  setup  and installed correctly  and  operated and maintained as recommended     Trademarks    SIMATIC    and SINEC   are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG     Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to  trademarks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners     Copyright    Siemens AG 1995 All rights reserved    The reproduction  transmission or use of this documentor its contents is  notpermitted withoutexpress written authority  Offenders willbe liable for  damages  Allrights  incl
52.  buffer  View alarm buffer   Print alarm buffer    Delete alarm buffer    Message Acquisition    In buffer with date  time  state       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 1 Functions of C7 623 and C7 624    Setpoint Input      Number or letters X X      Symbolic variables X X    Display of Actual Value  numerical and symbolic  SE E    Combined Actual Value Display and Setpoint  Input    Limit Value Limit Value Check of Operator Input   of Limit Value Check of Operator Input   Input    Password Protection  also by means of authorization  input        Screens       Maximum number 99 99      Display X X      Print X X      Screen entries per screen 99 99      Maximum number of fields per screen 300 300      Maximum number of fields per screen entry 32 32    Recipes   Maximum number 99 99  View X X  Print X X  Recipe entries per recipe 99 99  Recipe memory size  in Kbytes  4 20  Data records per recipe  maximum  99 99  Save fetch data record in from the C7   OP    X X  Information Text      Maximum length  characters  320 320    Function Keys       Number 16       integrated LEDs  Softkeys  number  tere a    Loss   Diagnostic Function    STATUS FORCE VAR    Configurable C7 OP Languages   German  English  French  Italian  Spanish  Russian X X    C    Changing Languages in Online Mode             C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 3    C7 OP Functionality Stan
53.  by using the  assigned soft keys     Using the soft keys beneath the Screen segments outside the  symbols  lt  lt  and  gt  gt   you can move   viewable display area are displayed   the displayed screen segment of the   current screen     You branch to the next screen by  pressing the soft key beneath the  appropriate text indicating the name  of the screen to be called        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 11    Operating the C7  General     Figure 6 5 shows the branch principle with reference to the 8 line display of  the C7 624     Basic screen C7 624    Event msg  Alarm msg  Screens Record    StatVAR ForceVAR  System Password    Figure 6 5 Branching at Screen Level  Example for C7 624  8x40 Character  Display        Figure 6 6 shows the branch principle of the C7 623 4 line display        Basic screen C7 623    Event msg  Alarm msg      gt  gt                 Figure 6 6 Branching at Screen Level  Example for C7 623     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  6 12 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     6 3 1 Setting C7 OP Operation Modes    Overview A standard screen can be used to set the C7 OP modes On line  Off line and  Download  You can set the C7 OP modes via the basic screen  as long as a  configuration which contains this screen is loaded  Table 6 3 provides a  description of these modes     Table 6 3 C7 Operating Modes    Operating Mode Explanation  On line In On line mode  there is either a logical link between the C7 OP  and the C
54.  change from  STOP     RUN     Alternatively  you can also change some parameters in the application  program with the SFC 55 to 57  see Reference Manual  235       We subdivide the parameters for the two configuration alternatives into   e Static parameters and  e Dynamic parameters    The following table explains when the static and dynamic parameters are  adopted   Table 4 1 Time of Transfer of the Parameters from the C7 CPU to the Analog I O    Parameter Set with Time of Parameter  Transfer    Hardware configuration SSTOP  gt RUN     gt  RUN    Dynamic Hardware configuration ee   gt  RUN    Assignment of The following parameter blocks permit the assignment of parameters in S7  Parameters for Hardware configuration to define the following characteristics of the analog  Characteristics T O        e For inputs      Basic setting      Diagnostics      Measurement      Alarm cycle  e For outputs      Basic setting      Diagnostics      Substitute values        Output range    Analog Input Table 4 2 provides an overview of the analog input parameters   Parameters    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 7    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 2 Analog Input Parameters    Parameter Analog Output  Value Range Preset Value    Basic setting  e Enable diagnostic alarm Yes No No    Diagnostics  e Enable Yes No    Configuration parameter  error    Wire break  only 4   20 mA   Range undershoot  Range overshoot   Wire break t
55.  directory     Screen entries     Screen Hierarchy  Standard Screens   Screen hierarchy   Screen level   exiting   Screen number   evaluation   Screen number area   Screen segment  move   Screen structure   Screen title   7 18    Screen  lt a    Screens   maximum number   SDB   Second functions  keys   Section of the system function menu   Select    directory   recipe   Select count  flank     Selecting screens  with function keys     with softkeys   Self test  2 4   Separate display variant   Serious system messages   Set  contrast   Setpoints     Setting time  analog output   SFB                                     Pl 9 8  6 3    SHIFT keys  9 8    Sign conventions  analog ranges   Sign key     Index 8    SIMATIC S7       function keyboard image  9 10   p    images     LED image   recipes   9 19  screen number area   system keyboard image   transfer data records   9 20  SIMATIC S7 connection  Scheduler bits  9 14   SIMATIC S7 coupling  control and checkback bits   coupling identifier   date and time   job area  9 16   OP operation mode   9 15   OP restart   ready bit   Size of the acknowledgement areas   9 7   Slot number   Slots  C7   Softkey  bit set   Softkeys   6 4  6 11   components of screen entry   7 21  number   Special characters   Special input  addresses   counter   Special screens  screen number area  9 12   Speed  C7 CPU   Standard  operating  6 8  Standard screen  screen hierarchy   6 10  Standard screens   branching   Standby message  2 2   Standby messages  
56.  in    Appendix C   Inhibiting System You can inhibit the display of system messages  with the exception of  Messages internal errors 7xx  at the configuration stage  System messages whose    display has been suppressed continue to be inserted into the system message  buffer and can thus be viewed on the display later  by selecting the menu     System settings     System messages          System Message The system message buffer can store up to 100 messages  System messages   Buffer are inserted into it with their message number and their arrival  their  departure is not recorded  Some minor errors and operator errors are not  logged in the system message buffer  Messages from the system message  buffer are displayed in the same order as they arrive  this means first in first  out  last in last out     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  7 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 1 4 Displaying Messages    Overview Event and alarm messages are always output to the display at message level  and are displayed according to display and message priorities     Select Message You enter the message level by pressing  Level ESC    Display Sequences Event and alarm messages can be configured with up to 80 characters and  displayed either separately or together  The differences are explained in Table  7 1 below     Table 7 1 Explanation of Display Sequences    Display Sequence Explanation    Separate With this display variant only one message is shown on the  display   Exceptio
57.  memory     1  Erase the entire contents of the load memory using the appropriate STEP  7 function     2  Activate the STEP 7 function    copy RAM to ROM     In this way  the  empty load memory will be    loaded    into the flash memory  Afterwards   this is also empty     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  2 12 C79000 G7076 C624 01       Control with the C7 CPU    In this Chapter The C7 CPU is described in this chapter     You will learn which languages can be used to program the C7 CPU and  which tools are necessary     The characteristics of the C7 CPU can be configured using parameters  The  characteristics that can be configured are described in  Chapter 3 5     3   3   3   3   3   3   i   Parameter Block    Cycle Behavior           Response Time of the C7 CPU   2   3   3   Diagnostics Interrupt Response Time      3 7 Test and Reference Data Functions of the    C7 CPU  Load Erase C7 CPU Flash Memory         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 1    Control with the C7 CPU    3 1 C7 CPU  Overview    C7 CPU C7 CPU possesses the following characteristics   Cheracteristles e 24 Kbytes work memory   e 40 Kbytes integrated load memory RAM   e 40 Kbytes integrated flash memory   e Integrated IM 360   e Speed  approx  0 3 ms per 1000 statements   e Connection of max  512 digital inputs outputs    e Connection of max  128 analog inputs outputs    e Buffer battery    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 2 Programmi
58.  number does not exist   Too many current control values on screen   maximum of 200 permitted    Too many fields on process screen    Process connection for soft keys does not  exist   Soft key number too high   Information text for soft key not configured  or not in all   languages   Soft key specified in entry does not exist       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 26 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      636 Initiated event messages  No  x  not configured Add to configuration and repeat    637 download     638 The actual value field for event message no  x is available     639 in symbolic form only      640 Initiated alarm messages  No  x  not configured Add to configuration and repeat    641 download     642 The actual value field for alarm message no  x is     643 available in symbolic form only      645 Internal errors     649      650 Area pointer for function you used not configured Configured area pointer      653 Configured user version number does not agree with that   Adjust user version number  stored in C7 CPU    655 controller acknowledgement area not physically beyond   Re configure C7 CPU     C7 O I  alarm message bit area  serious error  no startup  acknowledgement areas and repeat  download    657 Configured controller driver not supported by version of   Change protocol for version of device  device you are using  serious error  you are using and repeat download  configuration    659 Invalid variable 
59.  occurs  but the corresponding OB  has not been programmed     Table 3 5 List of OBs    Error Activated OB   Possible Start Preset Priority  Events of the OB    Time error OB 80 3501H  35024    e g  initiated by the cycle time monitor  35054  3507H  Power supply error OB 81 38224  3922H   e g  also absence of backup battery        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3      Control with the C7 CPU    Table 3 5 List of OBs    Error Activated OB   Possible Start Preset Priority  Events of the OB   One of the following errors has occurred  OB 85 35A1qy  39B1y  26  e Event that triggers OB start  e g  delay alarm  has 39B24   occurred but the relevant OB cannot be executed  e Error during update of the process image  Communications error OB 87 35E1y  35E2    26  e Wrong message frame identifier when receiving global 35E6H   data   The data block for the global data status is not available   or too short    Programming error OB 121 25214  25224  The same prior    e g  the addressed timer does not exist  2523H  25244  ity as the OB in  2525H  2526H  which the error  2527H  2528H  has occurred  25294  2530H   2531H  2532p   2533H  2534H   2535H  253AH   253Cy  253EH    Error during direct peripheral access  defective or absent OB 122 29444  2945H The same prior   module  ity as the OB in  which the error   has occurred       OB 121 and Please note the following peculiarity of the C7 CPU in connection with OBs  OB 122 121 and 122   Note    Please note the following 
60.  of the  Analog Outputs    Table for Output Table 4 10 contains the analog output ranges of the analog output   Ranges   Voltage  Current Table 4 10 contains the representation of the voltage output range   10V  Output Ranges and the current output ranges  20 mA  4   20 mA    Table 4 10 Representation of the Analog Output Range of the Analog Outputs  Voltage Current Output Ranges     Output Output Output Units  Range Range Range    E    11 7589 32511 7EFFH    Upper range  10 0004 20 0007 6COly  10 0000    Nominal range          10 0000  10 0004    Lower range       11 7589       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 14 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 6   Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog I O    Introduction You can find the definitions and relationships between conversion time and  cycle time for the analog inputs in this chapter     Conversion Time The conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and an additional  conversion time necessary for the input calibration     Cycle Time The analog digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured  value to the C7 CPU is performed sequentially  i e  the analog input channels  are converted one after the other  The cycle time  1 e  the elapsed time before  an analog input value is converted again  is the sum of all conversion times   O S5ms channel  of all activated analog input channels plus one calibration  measurement  Unused analog input chann
61.  program  you can recognize whether a connection to  the C7 OP exists    Description of Byte n 3 serves to synchronize the transfer of data records and indirect vari  byte n 3 ables  The meanings of the individual bits are described below  Exactly how  the transfer works is described in Chapter 9 7 3  Bit 0 1   Data mailbox is disabled  is set only by the C7   OP   0   Data mailbox is enabled   Bit 1 1   Data record variable is errored   Bit 2 1   Data record variable is correct   Bit3 1   Data transfer terminated successfully   Bit 4 1   Request data record variable   Bit5 1  C7 OP should read the data mailbox   Bit6 1   Request data mailbox disable    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    9 15    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 6 2 Data Areas in the Interface Area    Overview In this section  the layout and usage of the interface data areas is described     The C7 CPU initiates an action to be carried out on the C7 OP by means of  the  job area   All other bytes are areas in which the C7 OP writes data   These areas can be evaluated by the C7 CPU program  The bytes are  individually described below     Job Area Byte n 4 to n 11   The C7 OP is passed on the control jobs via the job area  The actions on the  C7 OP are initiated in this way     The job area consists of four words  In the first word of the job area is the job  number  In further words  the job parameters are to be entered  maximum 3      Address  n 4    T7 0 
62.  program loaded   e A control program is loaded  e No configuration loaded   e A configuration is loaded    How you should proceed in these cases is explained in the following    sections   Load Control The C7 OP must access data in the C7 CPU in order to permit the operation  Program and monitoring of the process  Therefore the control program must be loaded    first of all  if this has not already been done  You load the application  program in the following way     1  Activate the transmission of the application program and the data blocks  on your programming device PC by means of STEP 7    2  Set the C7 CPU in the STOP mode  see Chapter 2 2      3  Start the copy process from the programming device PC     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  2 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    No Configuration  Loaded    Configuration  Loaded    Reload  Configuration    Commissioning  Start Up     You now select the C7 OP mode in which you can initiate the transfer of a    configuration  To do this you press the   E gt    key   ENTER    The following menu is displayed with the menu item    off line              SIMATIC C7         Entry field    MODE Offline                      Figure 2 2 Menu for Selection of a C7 OP Mode    O  SHIFT  1  Select the Transfer function with V    Confirm the selection with  ENTER    The configuration will be loaded via the MPI interface using Transfer     2  Activate the transmission of the configuration to C7 using your  programing device PC with    ProTool or ProTool 
63.  recipe  directory     Contrary to operational messages  fault messages indicate critical machine  states during the production sequence  Due to their importance  they must be  acknowledged before further actions are possible     Fault messages may contain process values  The representation of the process  values is either numeric for example motor running at 4500 revolutions per  second  or symbolic     Information texts contain supplementary information which makes reference  to the current display  operational messages  fault messages and screens   In  this manner  additional information can  for example  be displayed  suggesting methods for the removal of a fault after receipt of a fault message     Messages can be logged on line by means of the printer connected to the  operator panel  In addition  it is possible to print out the operating and fault  messages that have accumulated in the respective buffer     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Introduction    Languages Message texts  screens  information texts and system messages can be  displayed in several languages  A maximum of three of the languages listed  below can be simultaneously loaded into a C7 and offered to the operator for  online selection     German  English  French  Italian    Spanish    Displays can be configured for the C7 624 in Russian  that is Cyrillic  characters     Configuration  Before a C7 can be commissioned  it must be prepared  that is configured  for  Process the task 
64.  response time of the analog output    Extension of the As a basic principle  you must consider that the cycle time of an user  Cycle Time  program will be increased by     Time controlled processing  Alarm processing  Diagnostics and error processing    Communications via MPI    Reduction of the You will achieve faster response times by means of direct accesses to the  Cycle Time I Os by the user program  for example  with L PIB or TPQW  This method  helps you avoid prolonged cycle times  as described in  Figure 3 4     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    3 25    Control with the C7 CPU    Operating System The operating system run time is caused by various sequences in the  Run Time C7 CPU     System Run Times Table 3 16 lists all times relevant for determining the operating system run  times of the C7 CPU     Table 3 16 Operating System Run Times of the C7 CPU    Cycle control Approx  870 us    Communications via the multipoint interface Block functions  load delete copy  extend the cycle by  max  10    Communications via the MPI may load the    cycle by up to 50    depending on the parameterization  in STEP 7  see Section 3 5 9      Updating of the S7 timers 7 us x number of timers currently running    C7 CPU self test From 0 to 65 000 us  depending on parameterization  see  Section 3 5  Section 3 5 9        Process Image Table 3 17 contains the C7 CPU times that are applicable to the process  Update image update  The quoted figures are    ideal value
65.  situations  To support changing requirements during process control  you can  configure the following aspects  which provide the operator with purposeful   situation specific help     e Screen dependent softkeys  e Global function keys    e User defined screen hierarchies    You can assign function calls to the function keys on the C7 623 and C7 624   You can distinguish here between local and global assignment     e Global means that the assignment applies to the entire configuration   e Local means that the assignment applies to one screen entry only     This makes it possible for the operator to initiate functions as and when  required by the situation  When the assignment of function keys vary from  screen entry to screen entry  the keys are referred to as softkeys     The following keys can be assigned as softkeys on the different devices     Table 8 1 Keys which can be assigned as softkeys    C7 623 FIFA    F4 These function keys can be configured as softkeys     These function keys can be globally assigned        C7 624   F1   F8 These keys  underneath the display  can be  configured as softkeys     K1   K1KI6   These function keys can be globally assigned     Note    While configuring softkeys you must make sure that function calls which are  required to be permanently available  this means also during screen editing   are not assigned to keys which are intended to be used as softkeys     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Key Assignment    Spe
66.  start e  From 0 e 0  address of to 8191    the data area     3 5 5 Parameter Block    Process Alarms       Parameter Block Table 3 10 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Process alarms        Process Alarms The priority of the process alarm OB40 cannot be altered     Table 3 10 Parameter Block    Process Alarms       Explanation Value Range Default Setting       Priority OB40 The priority of the OB40 cannot be altered     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 14 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 6 Parameter Block    Real Time Clock       Set Clock You set the C7 CPU clock using STEP 7 or via the SFC 0    SET_CLK       in the  user program  see Appendix A and Reference Manual  235      Parameter Block Table 3 11 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Real time clock        Real Time Clock       Table 3 11 Parameter Block    Real Time Clock     Explanation Value Range Default Setting  Synchronization  The synchronization of the real time clock is per    None as master None  on K bus formed via the K bus  Synchronization  Not possible None None  on the MPI    Synchronization  Interval during which the real time clock is syn  Default  interval chronized  Seconds ech  10 seconds  Minute  10 minutes  Hour  12 hours  24 hours    Correction factor A deviation of the real time clock is compensated   From   10000 to  with the correction factor within 24 hours    10000  Example  if the real time clock is slow by 4 ms  after 24 hours  then you must se
67.  stored then the load memory remains empty and the  C7 CPU has the memory content    0        After clearing the C7 CPU  the following items remain     The contents of the diagnostic backup  The contents can be read out using the programming device   System diagnostics parameters    Perhaps an user program loaded from the flash memory with newly  initialized data    The MPI parameters last set     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    2 11    Commissioning  Start Up     2 4 Load Erase C7 CPU Flash Memory    Overview During transmission of an application program to the C7 CPU  it is  transmitted only to the load memory and not automatically into the C7 CPU  flash memory also     The contents of a C7 CPU flash memory are not automatically reset during a  complete erasure of the C7 CPU     You must explicitly initiate these actions using a PG function     Load Application You must explicitly load the C7 flash memory using the STEP 7 function  Program into Flash    copy RAM to ROM     You do this after you have copied the program and  Memory data into the C7 CPU load memory  In this way  the whole contents of the    load memory is transmitted to the flash memory     Erase Flash After the complete erasure  the load memory is reinitialized with the contents   Memory of the flash memory  However  since you can change the contents of the flash  memory only using the STEP 7 function    copy RAM to ROM     you must  proceed in the following manner to erase the flash
68.  that require uninterruptible reading of   data    slow down    program execution irrespec    tively of the value set for this parameter  Exam    ple  status block  reading of system data    STEP 7      Maximum cycle time  in ms  If the cycle time exceeds the    maximum cycle From 1 150  time     then the C7 CPU reverts to the STOP to 6000  mode if no OB80 is provided for error handling   The maximum cycle time can be exceeded due to  e g       communications processes  e accumulation of error events  e errors in the user program  e g     continuous  loops        Cycle loading due to self test  ins    For    Cyclic self test A 0     then the C7 CPU tests   From 0  its internal RAM during the program cycle  This   to 65000  self test consumes cycle time  You can define the  time by which the program cycle may be length   ened in multiples of 10 us     0      no cyclic self   test         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 18 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 10 Parameter Block    MPI Addresses       Multipoint The characteristics of the multipoint interface MPI of the C7 CPU can be   Interface MPI assigned parameters with the parameter block    MPI addresses     You need  only process this parameter block if several C7 or S7 300 are networked via  the multipoint interface MPI     Values after The parameters of the parameter block    MPI addresses    have a specialty  the   Memory Reset parameter values are preserved even after a memory reset  Reason  the  c
69.  the application program can derive the actual frequency using the  following formula     Number of positive edges    Frequency      q y Measurement period    The measurement period can be selected using the STEP 7 Function Hardware  configuration  You can choose between the measurement periods 0 1s  1s or  10s  The measurement process is immediately restarted after the measurement  period has elapsed  so that an updated frequency counter value is always  available     The measurement period is 1 s  During a measurement period  6500 rising  edges of the signal to be measured are counted  The value 6500 is made  available to the application program     Frequency   e320   6500 Hz    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 33    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Frequency During  First Measurement  Period    4 34    After starting up the C7  OB 1 is processed and the universal input frequency  meter is automatically started     The Ist valid frequency is calculated after the Ist measurement period   Before the end of the 1st measurement period  the frequency counter value  FFFFFFy is available in the C7 CPU     Start up  OB100   Cycle  OB1    Cycle  OB1   Cycle  OB1     Preallocated       gt      J gt  ne    Valid frequency    Start of  1st measurement period 1st measurement period      Last frequency before STOP mode or  FFFFFFy if POWER ON        Figure 4 9 Frequency During First Measurement Period    C7 623  C7   624
70.  the following parameters are to be set for  communication via the MPI     Note    The following parameters are already assigned generally applicable default  values and need not be modified unless the C7 is used in connection with  any other S7  C7 or OP units in a network     Table 9 1    Parameter Explanation  CPU type Control CPU   The S7 300 is to be set for the C7 CPU  If further CPUs are  connected  they must be set with S7 300 or S7 400   CPU address MPI address of the C7 CPU in the network configuration  The  address has a default setting but can also be assigned by the  user  It must be unique in a network     Slot subrack Here you must set the slot and subrack  For the C7  the valid  setting is   Slot 2  Subrack 0    C7 OP address MPI address of the C7 OP in the network configuration  The  address can be freely issued  It must be unique in the network  configuration  The default value is address 2     Interface Here  you determine which interface of the OP the S7 is  connected to    Baud rate The data transfer rate between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU is  fixed at 187 5 kbaud        Configuration Tool All settings can be made with ProTool and ProTool Lite  under the menu  Target System     Control     C7 Speciality The first control in the list must always be the C7 CPU since the C7 system  function    DI DO status display    always accesses the digital I O of the first  control in the list     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  9 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for 
71.  use the following system functions to read and write diagnostics  Functions information     SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time    SFC 51 RDSYSST Read the information out of the system status list 280 us    200 us data set  WR_USMSG Write specific diagnostics information into the diagnostics 110 us  buffer       Module The C7   CPU places the following system functions at your disposal for  Initialization writing and reading initial module parameters   Functions    SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time    WR_PARM Writing dynamic parameters to a module  WR_DPARM Writing predefined parameters to a module    ball a PARM_MOD Assigning a module   s parameters    WR_REC Writing a module specific data record 1 4 ms    32 us byte    SFC  59   RD_REC Reading a module specific data record a Reading a module specific data record specific data record   0 49ms 49   0 49ms       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 A 5    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       System Status List in the C7 CPU    Introduction The C7 CPU is able to provide you with certain information  The C7 CPU  stores this information in the    system status list        This appendix contains the sublists of the system status list provided by the  C7 CPU     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 B 1    System Status List in the C7 CPU    Definition    Reading the  System Status list    Sublists    Structure of the  Sublists    B 2    The system status list contai
72.  when alpha numeric values are being  entered  All the characters thereafter are moved one  position to the left    Enter key With this key you enter and confirm your input    This means  that among other things  you also change  from message level to screen level    Escape key Escape  branch backwards  change operating levels    see page 6 5     C7   623  C7   624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 3       Operating the C7  General     Function  Keypad    Soft  Keypad    6 4    Table 6 1 Key Function  Continued     Hardcopy Outputs the current display to the printer   eee key  Print     Help key   displays  information  text     Arrow keys    Browse the  symbol list    Display  contrast  adjustment    Select system  functions  menu    Note    When the assigned LED is on  information text  relating to the current display can be viewed on the  screen  seq Section 6 5      Move the cursor  Depending on the operating  situation  the cursor is moved one character  field   entry or display to the left  right  up or down     The keys have a repeat function  When the keys are  pressed and held down  after a short time delay  the  input entry is repeated for as long as the key is pressed  down     Browses through the list of symbols and calls up  extended character sets     Adjusts the display   s contrast     The menu for choosing the C7 CPU operating modes   RUNP  RUN  STOP and MRES  is displayed  The  DI DO condition is also displayed  The menu can be  selected from every l
73. 0  99     O Cursor positioned to first entry    RB  Field number  0 1   The input fields of an entry are numbered  consecutively   0 Entry number field  1 First input field  nLast input field  The numbering of the input fields starts at 1 again for    each entry     Output fields are ignored by the serial numbering  system     54   Print recipe  Parameter 1 Recipe number  1  99   Parameters 2 Data record number  1  99   Parameters 3      Transfer recipe data record to C7   OP  Parameter 1 Recipe number  1  99  Parameters 2 Data record number 1  99  Parameters 3 0 1  0  Data record is not overwritten     1  Data record is overwritten     70   Transfer recipe data record from C7   OP to C7 CPU  Parameter 1 Recipe number  1  99  Parameters 2 Data record number 1  99    Parameters 3       71   Partial screen updating  Parameter 1 0  Off  1  On  Parameters 2 3    This job may not be initiated if no screen is selected   72   Cursor positioning in current process picture  Parameter 1 Entry number  0  99   Parameter 2 Field number  0  8     Parameter 3 Cursor lock  O off 1 on        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 13    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     Cursor positioning in current special screen    Parameter 1 Field number  Parameter 2 Cursor lock  O off 1 on   Parameter 3      Keyboard emulation    Parameter 1   Internal function number  System keyboard number    Passwor
74. 000 Johannesburg       27  11  407 4111  BW  27  11  407 48 15  Fax  27  11  407 46 82       Tunesien    TN 2062 Romana Le Bardo  FAZE Sarl Electrotechnique   Hr  Fantar  Immeuble Cham  T 1216 8 51 90 91  Fax  2 16  1  50 19 32    TN 2035 Charguia Il Tunis  SITELEC S A  Hr  Mouelhi  16  Rue de l Usine   Zone industrielle  A  roport    BP 115  1050 Tunis Cedex     216  1  70 00 99  Fax  2 16  1  71 70 10    Zimbabwe    Electro Technologies Corp   Pvt   Ltd    Siemens Zimbabwe    Hr  Ron Claassens  Savoy House  cnr  Inez Terrace J  Moyo Ave   P  BO  Box 46 80   1563  a   2 18 be       Fax  263  4  75 44 06    Amerika    Argentinien    8000 Bahia Blanca    Prov  de Buenos Aires  Siemens S A   Hr  S Duran   on uez 159   T AR 55 61 41  Fax 134 91  55 61 71    1650  San Martin   rov  de Buenos Aires  Siemens S A   PEI AUT   Hr  Rudriguez Juis Hr  Roland Herron   Gral  Roca 1865  Ruta 8  km 18 C C      54  1  7 38 71 92 7 15  a  54  1  7 38 71 85  Fax  54  1  7 38 71 71             5000 Cordoba  Prov  de Cordoba  Siemens S A   Hr  S  Garcia   Campillo 70   T  54  51  73 9940 994   Fax  54  51  72 97 14    5539 Las Heras  Prov  de Mendoza  Siemens S A   Hr  S  Suarez   Acceso Norte 379   T  54 R 30 00 22 0 37   Fax  54  61  30 00 22 0 37    2000 Rosario  Prov  de Santa Fe  Siemens S A   Hr  R  Stiza   Ricchieri 750       54  1  41 37 03 21 0   Fax  54  1  41 37 07 87    Bolivien    La Paz   Sociedad Comercial e Industrial  Hansa Ltda   E  amp  A  Hr  Beckmann  Calle Mercado esq  Yana
75. 1    222 Event buffer full to remaining buffer space Delete buffer or configure smaller  remaining buffer space    224 Event buffer full  buffer partially deleted and forced  printout initiated    225 Alarm buffer full to remaining buffer space Delete buffer or configure smaller  remaining buffer space    227 Alarm buffer full  buffer partially deleted and forced  printout initiated      229 Keyboard connector faulty or loose  hardware fault  Return device for repair       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 18 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      250 Changeover to required OP mode not possible via job  This message may occur  for example   when trying to change over to  loop   through mode during  communications via FAP     252 Recipe functions of the TD OP cannot be carried out  simultaneously  Two examples for situations where  message 252 may be issued       The selected function is already active  e g  in the  background  used by the controller       The operator tries to transfer or delete a data record  after selecting it     256 Insufficient memory space for executing the selected  function  Select the function again  If the message is still  output  simplify    the screen layout  i e  configure fewer  screen elements functions  Examples       Shift the function causing the message to another  screen      Do not use any curves in connection with this function      259 A data record must be transferred to the cont
76. 1  universal input 2 set  Bit   0  universal input 2 reset  Bit   1  universal input 3 set  Bit   0  universal input 3 reset     Bit   1  universal input 4 set  Bit   0  universal input 4 reset     Bit 4      Bit   1  Counter counting  Bit   0  Counterl stopped   Bit5     Bit   1  Counter2 counting  Bit   0  Counter2 stopped   Bit 6    Bit   1  Counter3 counting  Bit   0  Counter3 stopped         Only relevant when universal inputs assigned as count input       Output Range If the universal inputs are used as counters  then the behaviour of the  counters is controlled via the output range     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 21    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 17 Addresses and Weighting of the Output Range of the Count Inputs    Control of Counter 1  3    PQW274 Start comparison value counter 1     PAB276  0   Counter  disable 1   Counterl enable  0   New start comparison value not valid    1   Set new start comparison value    PQW277 Start  comparison value counter 2    PAB279  0   Counter2 disable 1   Counter 2 enable  0   New start comparison value not valid  1   Set new start comparison value   PQW280 Start  comparison value counter 3    PAB282  0   Counter3 disable 1   Counter 3 enable  0   New start comparison value not valid    1   Set new start comparison value         Initial value for down counter  comparison value for up counter    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 22 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Ad
77. 2  Delete buffer  press    Do not delete buffer  press  ESC    By default  an overflow warning is output to the display when the alarm  message buffer reaches the configured residual buffer size  Output of the  overflow warning can be enabled and disabled on  line by means of the  standard screen   Alarms     Overflow  If the alarm message buffer cannot accept any more  messages  those which have been acknowledged and have departed are the  first to be deleted automatically until the configured residual buffer size is  reached     If the residual buffer is still not free  further messages are deleted  The  deleting process occurs in the following sequence     e Alarm message acknowledged   not yet departed  e Alarm message not acknowledged   already departed  e Alarm message not acknowledged   not departed    If    overflow logging    has been configured  and an operational printer is  connected to the C7  a compulsory print out of all the deleted messages is  forced     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Sar ON  Functions     Automatic Deletion  of the Event Buffer  upon Buffer  Overflow    Automatic Deletion  of the System  Message Buffer  upon Buffer  Overflow    By default  an overflow warning is output to the display when the event  message buffer reaches the configured residual buffer size  Output of the  overflow warning can be enabled and disabled on  line by means of the  standard screen Events     gt  Overflow  If the event message buffer cannot
78. 2 CI   3 FC  4 Period time counter    O No  1 Yes  always with alarm DI    selectable if use   2     0 edge O Rising  edge  1 Falling edge   only if use     or   2   0 Direction O Forwards  1 Backwards  if use   2   0 Gate time 0 0 1s  l s  2 10s  if use   3   0 Use 0 Disable  normal DI   1 Alarm DI  0 Process alarm O No   always when deactivated   1 Yes  always    with alarm DI   selectable if use   2     O Rising edge  1 Falling  edge     only if not deactivated     AII Measurement type    Cycle end alarm     Q No  1 Yes       Measurement range 0 Deactivated        00      Cycle time 0 16ms  1 continuous  ca 2 5ms   6 3ms   7 3 5ms  8 4ms    0 5ms increments    1    0 Deactivated  1 Voltage   2 Current     only if Byte 4  lt  gt 1        3 4  20mA  4  20mA  if measurement    type current     9  10V     if measurement type voltage     Measurement type    Cycle end alarm     0 No  1 Yes    Measurement range 0 Deactivated     O Deactivated  1 Voltage  2 Current     only if Byte 4  lt  gt 1     3 4  20mA  4  20mA  if measurement    type current     9  10V     if measurement type voltage     Measurement type    0 No  1 Yes    Cycle end alarm        O0 Deactivated  1 Voltage  2 Current     only if Byte 4  lt  gt 1        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    4 40    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 23 Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block  Continued     What Can Be Assigned Meaning of the Respective Bit
79. 4 01    Alarm messages  7 3   compulsory print   maximum length   maximum number   viewing total numbers    Alarm messages area  bit set  9 4   Alarm OB     Alarm time  parameter block     73  Alphanumeric values   Analog function  parameter   Analog I O  relationship   4 17  Analog input  diagnostics   measurement values     parameter    Analog output  diagnostics   output ranges   parameters    Analog ranges  resolution   sign conventions   4 11    Analog digital conversion  4 15    Area pointer  screen number area   9 12    Arrow keys    Assignment  functions keys  8 3                   Backward counting     Basic functions   Basic screen  6 11    Basic setting  parameter block   3 4       Bit memory    Bit number    Bit set    Blank  insert   6 3   Block diagram  frequency counters integrated  function   4 33    Blocks    Branch backwards   6 5    Index 1    Index    Buffer  battery   3 13  Buffer overflow     C  C7    parameter assignment   3 9  reference functions   test functions   C7 processor   C7 CPU  1 2  block   3 6  characteristics     cycle time     parameter   response time   terms   C7 CPU flash memory  erase   load   C7 CPU modes menu   C7 I O diagnostics   C7 OP  terms   C7 OP model  selection   2 3   C7 OP modes   6 13  C7 Operate  what do you eae  C7 Operating modes  setting   C7   CPU job  data record C7   CPU     gt  C7 OP     data record C7   OP     gt  C7    CPU  C 13  C7 CPU modes     select   C7 OP functions   C7 OP operation   Calling password  auto
80. 4 01 C 23    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Message Cause Action      600 Wrong parameter transferred by ProTool Lite Set required value by means of   overflow warning  standard screen or controller      601 Set required value by means of    standard screen or controller    Wrong parameter transferred by ProTool Lite   message log       602 Re configure and repeat download of    required value    Wrong parameter transferred by ProTool Lite   remaining buffer size       603 Recipe setpoint is only set up symbolically       604 Configure messages and repeat    download    Message not configured for a set message bit      605 Process connection only configured symbolically       606 Too many message variables are configured       607 Configured data type does not exist       608 Process connection only configured symbolically       609    Screen number does not exist       610 Control operator object for header or footer does not    exist or is not allowed       611 Special operator object for buffer printout does not exist       613 Create DB or required length in    controller    Data block does not exist or is too short      614 The layout of the listing had not been configured when    the print job was issued       615 Line to be output is larger than the reserved print Check configuration for log  memory or the number of control sequences is too large      616 See Internal Errors      617      618 Wrong value entered  Bit no  is actual 
81. 4 93    Russland    113043 Moskau   Siemens AG  Hr  Engelhard    Hr  Michailow  Ul  Dubininskaja 98  T 007  8 8  5 36 63 60  Fax 0 07  0 95  2 36 62 00    Schweden    40020 Gotebor  Siemens AB  ASP  Hr  Ohlsson  Ostergardsgatan 2 4    Box 1 41 53  7 76 86 53    T 0046 134   Fax 00 46  31  7 76 86 76    55111 SHOE    Siemens AB  ASP  Hr  Jonsson  Klubbhusgatan 15  Box 10 07  T 0046 30 15 29 00   Fax 00 46  36  16 51 91    20123 Malmo   Siemens AB  ASP  Hr  Jamtgren  Grimsbygatan 24  Box 326   T 004 20  17 46 14   Fax 00 46  40  17 46 17    85122 Sundsvall   Siemens AB  ASP  Hr  SPE  Lagergatan 14  Box 76   T 0046  80  18 56 00   Fax 00 46  60  61 93 44    Hr PERLA i ae 19487 Upplands Vasby Stockholm   Fax 00 39 3 66 76 28 20 5020 Salzbur Siemens AB  ASP A1  Hr  Persson  Siemens AG  AUT  Hr  Mariacher Jun Jonanneslandsvagen 12 14  Innsbrucker Bundesstra  e 35 00 46 9 7 28 14 64   35129 Padova Postfach 3 Fax 00 46  8  7 28 18 00   a T e a   sues  8 85  4 48 83 35   r  Millevoi  Viale dell Industria  i   T 0039 a9  829 19 11 Fax 00 43  6 62  4 48 83 09 Schweiz   Fax 00 39  49  8 07 00 09 4214 Wien 1020 Renens Lausanne  Siemens AG  AUT 1  Hr  Strasser  ee a ye uuae   00142 Roma Siemensstrake 88 92       Siemens S p A   AUT R10A    Hr  Vessio  Via Laurentina  455     0039 e 5 00 95 1   Fax 00 39  6  5 00 95 20    10127 Torino   Siemens S p A   AUT R10A   Hr  Montoli  Via Pio VII  127  B 0039 HR 6 17 3 1  Fax 00 39  11  61 61 35    Kroatien    41000 Zagreb  Siemens d o o   Hr  Culja
82. 5 Northbrook Court   T  1  B54  4 35 08 80   Fax  1  604  4 35 10 23    Kolumbien    Baranquilla   Siemens S A   EA  Hr  C  Perez   Carrera 58 No  709 40   T  57 faa  56 1148   Fax  57  958  56 11 48    Bogota 6  Siemens S A   Division Energia   Hr  M  Jaramillo  Carrera 65  No  11 83  aa 80150    57 2 94 22 66  Fax  57   2 94 24 98    Cali   Siemens S A   Barranquilla   Hr  Guido Hernandez  Carrera 40  No  13 05   T  57  35  66 4 44 00  Fax  57  92 66 5 30 56    Cali   Siemens S A  Cali Hr  C  A  Naranjo  Carrera 48 A  15 Sur 92   T  57 A 2 66 30 66   Fax  57  94  2 68 25 57    Mexiko    02300 Mexico  D F   Siemens S A  de C V   El AUT   Hr  Gregorio Sanchez  Delegacion Azcapotzalco  Poniente 116  No  590  Colonia Industrial Vallejo  Apartado Postal   15 064  02600 mexico     52  5  3 28 20 00  Fax  52  5  3 28 21 92  Fax  52  5  3 28 21 93          Peru    Lima 13   ESIM Sa  Dept  AUT    Hr  Paz Soldan   Avda  N  Arriola 385 4to Piso  T  51 1143 71 46 61   Fax  51  14  71 09 93    Siemens Worldwide    USA    Alpharetta  GA 30202  A Inc   Regional Sales Manager  Sautheast  Hr  Mich Gunyon   Technology Drive   1 4 bd  7 40 36 ob  Fax  1  4 04  7 40 36 96       Andover  MA 01810   SIA Inc   North East Region    Hr  Mark Fondl  One Tech Drive   Suite 310   T 41 2 oR 6 85 60 77   Fax  1  5 08  6 86 88 72    Houston  TX 77040   SIA Inc   SouthWest Region    Hr  Wade Bradford   13100 Northwest Freeway  Suite 210  T  1 3 690033   Fax  1  713  4 60 44 50    Mason  OH 45040 9011  SIA
83. 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Contents             7 Standard O I Functions 124 3ccerceneecdcenew capes doesenteewn tee wates aca  7 1 Nici   0  ea ee er ee eee ee  7 1 1 Event and Alarm Messages             0 cece cece e cence teen eens  7 1 2 Acknowledging and Suppressing Alarm Messages                005   7 1 3 SyStem Messages   sacs s2ee4 caves Kees EEA ROK MES eR Ee DNS ARREA  7 1 4 Displaying Messages           0    cc ccc cece eee e eee  7 1 5 Viewing Message Buffers          0    ccc eee eens  7 1 6 Deleting Messages            ccc cece eee eee tenet eenaee  7 1 7 Printing Messages              cc cece cece eee eee ene nees  7 2 SCEN Siegert yee ena ee ee a oe ee See  7 3 Information Text    2    0    eee eee eee eee e enn  7 4 RODO soane rener Cae esas Fae ee aes Bae aie ene  7 4 1 Setting Up and Editing Data Records               0    cece eee  7 4 2 Copying Data Records          annann anaana eect n eens  7 4 3 Transferring Data Records            0  ccc eee eens  7 4 4 Deleting Data Records            0  ccc tenet eens  7 5 STATUS VAR and MOD VAR with the C7 OP                cence ees 7 35  8 Extended O I Functions          0ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueneennees  8 1 Process Dependent Operator Guidance                   eee eee eeee  8 1 1 Self defined Screen Hierarchy          0 0 0 cece cee eee eens 8 4  8 2 Controlling the C7 OP from the C7 CPU              0    eee 8 7  8 3 CMCC CTS sok tare ato a EE a A AEE cures se he Gre ese ene 
84. 7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    Priorities The messages have various display priorities     Table 7 2 Explanation of Priorities    Display priority System messages always have the highest display priority and  unacknowledged alarm messages always have the second  highest priority  Otherwise  messages are displayed in different  sequences depending on whether separate or mixed output of  event and alarm messages has been configured     Message priority You can set message priorities from 1  low  to 4  high  for  alarm and event messages  according to their importance  If  several messages of the same display priority exist  simultaneously  they are displayed according to their message  priorities  Those with the highest message priority are shown  first and those with the lowest are shown last        Displaying If several messages having identical display and message priorities exist  First Last Message simultaneously  the most recent is displayed in all cases  for both event and  alarm messages     Depending on the value preset during configuration  the oldest message or  the most recent message is shown for alarm messages  You can use the  standard screen to modify the setting for viewing the oldest  first  or most  recent  last  alarm message when there are several of them waiting  To do  this  choose System     DispMsg and set the corresponding parameter     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 9    Sta
85. 7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 A 3    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU    Interrupt and The C7   CPU provides you with the following system functions for  Error Fault responding to interrupts and errors faults   Handling    SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time    MSK_FLT Masking sync faults 150 us  D A DMSK_FLT Enabling sync faults 160 us    READ_ERR Reading and erasing programming and access errors that have 160 us  occurred or have been disabled    DIS_IRT Disabling the handling of new interrupts 215 us    soe ena Re  Re triggering the scan time monitor Re triggering the scan time monitor scan time monitor 30 us    REPL_VAL Copying a substitute value into accumulator 1 of the level 45 us  causing the error    Status Changes You can influence the CPU status with the following system functions     SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time    WAIT Implementing waiting times 200 us          Address Allocation For allocating the free address of a module to the associated rack and slot   you can use the following SFCs     SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time  SFC 5 GADR_LGC Determining the free address of channel x of the signal  module in slot y     LGC_GADR Converting a free address into the associated slot and rack B US  number of a module    src  50   RD_LGADR Calculating all the predefined free addresses of a module   190 us     190 us         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  A 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU    Diagnostics You can
86. 7 624 Control Systems  4 44 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Sequence of Statements in OB1    ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1  var_temp  start_info array  0  19  of byte   end_var   BEGIN     L 10 0   T MDO     L 10 0   T MD4     L22   T MD8     CALL FC 127    lower limit  MD0   upper limit  MD4   setpoint  MD8   channel  PQW272        END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    4 6 2 Block for Scaling Analog Input Values    Function of Block    The FC126 block is used to convert the actual value entered as hexadecimal  number in a peripheral input word into a corresponding floating point number    analog value  to be output to a peripheral output word  For this purpose  a  simple calculation using the rule of three is programmed     1  First  the actual value is related to the total range  RANGE_HEX   resulting from the difference  UL     LL      The result is a percentage of the absolute actual value  This is identical in  the floating point number and in the hexadecimal representation     2  Then the total range  RANGE_DEC   resulting from the difference  UL      LL  is calculated in floating point number representation  depending on  the measuring range being unipolar or bipolar     3  Now the percentage  PERCENT  calculated before is related to the total  floating point number range     The result is the absolute read   in value   4  Finally  the lower limit  LL  is added to this value as offset     5  The resulting floating point numb
87. 7 CPU  The    module  error    bit is not set if no fur   ther error exists     Module fault Collective error  except no  module parameters  of all set  diagnostics bits    Internal error The error bit is set simulta   neously with the error bits     Watchdog        EEPROM  error     or    ADC error     In  addition  the watchdog is  activated with    EEPROM  error        Watchdog The watchdog error is identi   fied after an internal reset of  the module  The watchdog  error can arise as the result of  an EPROM or general mod   ule error     EEPROM error The error is identified after  resetting the module during  the reading of the calibration  values for the compensation  of the offset error of the ana   log I O from the serial    EEPROM     The error bit is set when  channel specific errors of the  analog inputs or outputs  occur     Channel error A channel causes an error   PLEASE CHECK    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    External error    Reaction of the BG    Report to C7 CPU that the  module is working with  default parameters  no chan   nel specific module diagnos   tics  no process and diagnos   tics alarms      The error is set reset with the  subordinate diagnostics bits   If the diagnostics alarm has  been assigned  one will be  generated     With watchdog  the module  adopts a safe state  0 V is  output  the measured values  become 7FFFy and the  counter values become  FFFF  FFFFFF      The module adopts a safe  state  O V is output  the mea
88. 7 CPU already  or the C7 OP attempts to establish a link     Off line In Off line mode  a logical link does not exist between the C7 OP    and C7 CPU  The C7 OP does not even attempt to establish a link     Download In transfer mode  data is transferred from the programming  device PC to the C7 OP  The transfer is achieved over the serial  interface  The C7 is not serviceable during the transfer        Configuration Not If either the configuration  or the basic screen for changing the C7 OP mode  Loaded is not loaded  you_can load the configuration afterwards  You must then reset  C7 OP  see also  section 2 1     Transfer in the The transfer of the configuration data from the PU PC is always carried out   C7 OP in the C7 OP  The transfer to the target device is described in the ProTool or  ProTool Lite manual  The OP is also situated there to stand in for the C7 623  and C7 624 as a target device     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 13    Operating the C7  General     Setting Operating The adjustment of the C7 OP operating modes is described below     Modes    Select the standard screen  System     Operation          Operation mode  On line F                      Press the key  SHIFT    and  if necessary  by pressing the    keys AN  o VZ several times  set the    required operating mode shown i    als Confirm your choice by pressing ne I he required mode is now set     Leave the standard screen by pressie GE          System setting    Display  Event Mess
89. 76 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 8 Parameter Block    Watchdog Alarms       Overview A watchdog alarm is a periodic signal that the C7 CPU generates internally  and leads to the automatic call up of a    Watchdog alarm OB     OB 35      Priority The priority of the OB 35 has a fixed setting of 12  You cannot change this  value    Parameter Block Table 3 13 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Watchdog alarms          Watchdog   Alarms       Table 3 13 Parameter Block    Watchdog Alarms       Explanation Value Range Default Setting       Periodicity of the OB Call up interval of the OB 35 from 1 100  to 60000    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 17    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 9 Parameter Block    Cycle Behavior       Parameter Block Table 3 14 list the parameters of the parameter block    Cycle behavior        Cycle Behavior       Table 3 14 Parameter Block    Cycle Behavior       Parameter Explanation Value   Default Set   Range ting    Cycle loading due to communication   To limit the extent of    slowing down    program From 5 20   processing due to communications processes  to 50   via the MPI   in    you can define the maximum percentage of cycle   loading  The communication between C7 CPU   and PG or between communicating C7 CPUs   can slow down due to the limitation of the cycle   loading  Operating system services such as the   collection and provision of data for the commu    nication will not be influenced    Functions
90. Alarms     gt  View   message buffer    The messages contained in the alarm message buffer are shown on the  display in the alarm message list  together with their message number  the  date and time of occurrence and the message status  arrived  departed or  acknowledged  and their acknowledgement group        Q Ack gr no 04 112 K on 12 04 95 09 34 00  Q Ack gr no 04 112 Q on 12 04 95 09 35 42                Figure 7 2 Example Display of alarm message buffer  for C7 524     Scroll through the message text using the keys VZ and AN    Table 7 4 Explanation of Example in Figure 7 2  Part of Message Explanation    Q Ack gr no Details relating to next field  acknowledgement group and alarm  message number     04 112 The displayed alarm message belongs to acknowledgement group 04   The alarm message number is 112     Message has arrived    Q Message has been acknowledged  Message has departed  Date and time of arrival acknowledgement departure of alarm message        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 7 11    Standard O I Functions    Displaying Alarm  Message Text    Viewing Total  Numbers of  Messages in event  message buffer    Displaying Event  Message Buffer    Displaying Event  Message Text    Viewing the Total  Number of  Messages in Event  Message Buffer    Viewing the  System Message  Buffer    7 12    Display message text for marked alarm message  D    Select the standard screen Alarms     Number   Here you receive an overview of all alarm messages in 
91. Application    Communication Display of  Number of links  Message frame length  Transmission rate via the MPI  Reserved OP links    Reserved programming device links    Free links    Time system Display of following values  C7 time  C7 date  Time system  Correction factor  Cycle of the synchronization frames    Cycle times Display of the cycle times of the user program  Monitoring time  Length of the longest cycle  Length of the shortest cycle  Length of the last cycle    Read diagnostics buffer Display the contents of the diagnostics buffer  e Date and time of the day of occurrence of an error event  e Designation of the error event    e Information describing the event more exactly  e g  error OB call for access errors    C7 CPU data Display of the following information for a C7  C7 type and version of the C7 CPU  Size of the work and load memories in the C7 CPU  Layout of the load memory  Number and area for the inputs  outputs  times  counters and flags  Area for local data  C7 system behavior       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 34 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    List of Test Table 3 19 lists the test functions of the C7 CPU   Functions    Table 3 19 Test Functions of the C7    Status variable Observe selected process variables  inputs  outputs  memory bits  times  counters  data  at a    specified position in the user program     Monitor variable Assign a value  cycle start  cycle end  transition RUN     STOP  to selected process variables     inpu
92. C7 CPU  the acknowledge bit C7 CPU      C7 OP must be reset using the application program by the time a renewed alarm mes     sage comes   Assignment of Every alarm message has a message number  To this message number  the  Acknowledgement same bit of the alarm message area and the bit multiplying of the  Bit to Message acknowledgement area are assigned  This is also valid for more than one  Number Acknowledgement area  if the length of the previous Acknowledgement area    does not encompass the entire length of the alarm message area     Figure 9 3 clarifies this situation        Alarm message area 1 Acknowledgement area  Alarm message no  1 Acknowledge bit for alarm rhessage no 1       Alarm message area 2 Acknowledgement area  Alarm message no  49 Acknowledge bit for alarm mes age no 49                Figure 9 3 Assignment of Acknowledge Bit and Message  Number    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  9 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Acknowledgement  Area C7 CPU     gt   C7 OP    Acknowledgement  Area C7 OP      C7 CPU    Size of the  Acknowledgement  AreasC7 CPU      C7 OP and C7 OP      C7 CPU     Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    One of the bits set in the C7 CPU area  causes the acknowledgement of the  corresponding alarm message at the C7 OP     The Acknowledgement area C7 CPU     C7 OP  e Must be immediately connected to the relevant alarm message area  e Must have exactly the same polling time and    e Can have the same maximum length as the corr
93. Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 2 Overview of User Data Areas    User Data Areas User data areas are used to exchange data between the C7 CPU and the  C7 OP  It is by means of these data areas that the C7 CPU and the C7 OP  communicate     The communication process consists of writing and reading information into  and out of the data areas  Upon evaluation of the data  the C7 CPU and the  C7 OP are triggered into the various actions     The user data areas can reside in any required memory area in the C7 CPU     Functionality The following user data areas are possible   e Event messages  e Alarm messages  e Recipes  e Control jobs  e System keyboard image  e Function keyboard image  e LED image  e Date and time  e Screen number area    e User version    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 3    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 3 Event and Alarm Messages    Message  Triggering    Message Areas    Message Bit and  Message Number  Assignment    9 4    Messages are triggered by setting a bit in one of the message areas in the  C7 CPU  The situation of the message area is defined by the configuration  tool  The corresponding area is also to be established in the C7 CPU     As soon as the bit in the event or alarm message area of the C7 CPU is set  and transferred to the C7 OP  the message is recognized as having    arrived        Conversely  after resetting the same bit in the C7 CPU  the message is  registere
94. For entering a symbolic value  proceed as follows     1     Press 0 vet in the input field  The activated Shift key is indi   cated by the illuminated LED     The selection list with the config   ured symbolic inputs is activated     2  Using the cursor key  select the required  value   3  Confirm the selected value with   The Shift key is automatically  ENTER de activated     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     6 5 Setting C7 System Parameters and Language    Overview After you have loaded a configuration  you can change the C7 OP system  settings via standard screens     Language  German  English  French  Italian and Spanish   Parameters       Change C7 OP interface parameters       Change printer parameters       Set message logging       Set message display  first last message        Set date and time    Adjust contrast    Setting the Messages  screens and information text can be displayed in several   Language languages  Up to three of the languages listed below can be loaded  simultaneously on the same C7 and presented to the operator for selection  on line     German  English  French  Italian    Spanish    Displays can also be configured in Russian  Cyrillic characters  on the  C7 624     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    6 19    Operating the C7  General     To choose another language  proceed as follows     Go to the screen level if it has not yet The basic screen is displayed   been set     
95. Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      702 Internal error  actual value error         Ee  w mess  ame renar erer onora mgr tvs     sm  mwe O       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 29    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    C 4 1 Internal Errors    Procedure    Possible Causes    C 30    The field numbers from 700 onwards and some errors defined in previous  sections are used to describe internal errors of the C7 control systems or the  ProTool configuring tools     Please proceed step by step as described below if an internal error occurs     Set the C7 CPU to STOP mode  Switch off the C7 and then restart it     Set the C7 OP to transfer mode during startup  Transfer the configuration  again and restart the C7     Should the error occur again  contact the Siemens regional office in your  vicinity  Specify the error number including any variables coming up in  the message     005  6xx  701  702  703  704  705  706    7XX    Error no    Var1      wie dt    Error in configuration file   Internal actual value errors   Invalid job  illegal job number or job parameter   Flash full  restrict your configuration   Controller error   Acknowledgement for unknown message  Recipe request already active    Internal errors    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       SIMATIC C7 and S7 Reference    Supplementary    Literature  70  S7 300 Programmable Controller    Hardware and Installation Manu
96. Measurement             0 00 cee eee een ees  4 5 Data Set Description for Parameter Block of C7 Analog I O and   Universal InputS          0    ccc eee eee tenes  4 6 Examples for Programming the Analog I O and the Universal Inputs       4 6 1 Block for Scaling Analog Output Values            0 0 00 c cece eee  4 6 2 Block for Scaling Analog Input Values                  0 00 cee eee  4 6 3 Example for Programming the Counters              0 cece cece eee  DIAQNOSUCS acess cctcecceeseeeusesetadeocwn dicted wedediweatewesdeese caw  5 1 Diagnostics Messages          ccc teen e eee e eae  5 2 Diagnostics Data of the C7 Analog I O and Universal Inputs             5 4  5 3 Constraints and Interactions of the Diagnostics Evaluation              5 8  Operating the C7  General                6  cc eee eee eee eens  6 1 KeyO0ald eree Enee seeeteeses oeeauegseoewseues erie era 6 2  6 2 Operating ME  a re  6 3 Operating with the Standard Functions               0 0 0  cece eens  6 3 1 Setting C7 OP Operation Modes               0    c cece ee eens  6 4 Entenng Valuas aawcugaven ad cent thon eter e ahead eeeea eee eha we Ea  6 5 Setting C7 System Parameters and Language                 0000ee   6 5 1 Changing Parameters On line          0    ccc cece eee ees  6 5 2 Contrast Adjustment         annann anaana eee teen eens  6 6 Password Protection          0 0  eee eee  6 6 1 Password Level and Access Rights  6 6 2 Password Management           2    cece cece eee eee eet eee nees       C7 
97. O   analog output     W    Watchdog alarm  B 7  3 9  parameter block  3 17   Wire break    Work memory   3 4    Index 9    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Qy  ox    Siemens AG  AUT E 146    Ostliche Rheinbriickenstr  50  D 76181 Karlsruhe  Federal Republic of Germany    From    Your Name    Your Title    Company Name   Street   City  Zip Code  Country   Phone     Please check any industry that applies to you      J Automotive O Pharmaceutical   O Chemical O Plastic   O Electrical Machinery  J Pulp and Paper   O Food O Textiles   O Instrument and Control  J Transportation    J Nonelectrical Machinery I OET e aaa a a     Petrochemical    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000   G7076 C624 01 1    Remarks Form    Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness  of our publications  Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire  and return it to Siemens     Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range  from    very good  to 5  poor      Do the contents meet your requirements    Is the information you need easy to find    Is the text easy to understand      Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements     Please rate the quality of the graphics tables     PE EE ELL    oe et OS ee Bee O a    Additional comments     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  2 C79000   G7076 C624 01    
98. STEP 7 processing  features Time system in the C7 CPU  STEP 7 instruction set    0013H User memory areas Working memory  Integrated load memory  Size of backup memory       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  B 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01    System Status List in the C7 CPU    Table B 1    SZL_ID    0014H Operating system areas  Block types   0015H All records of the sublist   0115H One record depending on the index    Loadable SDBs  0017H  0117H    Rack information   0018H All records of the sublist   0118H One record depending on the index  Interrupt error assignment via  number of assigned OBs   0021H Records of all possible interrupts   0A21H Records of all assigned interrupts  Interrupt status   02224 Record for the specified interrupt  Priority class   0023H Records for all priority classes  Only sublist header info    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Sublist Index     ID of the  Individual  Records of the    Sublist        SDB Number       00014  50504  00004    Sublists of the System Status list of the C7 CPU  Continued         Record Contents   Sublist Excerpt     Process image of the inputs  number in  bytes    Process image of the outputs  number  in bytes    Number of flags   Number of timers   Number of counters   Size of the I O address area    Entire local data area of the C7 CPU   in bytes     OBs  Number and size   DBs  Number and size   SDBs  Number and size   FCs  Number and size   FBs  Number and size        Interrupt class of free cycle 
99. Select the standard screen          System     Language     Contrast ic  Language ENGLISH                      Position the cursor to the selection  field ENGLISH    Select the required language via the  symbolic inputs  Only languages that  have been loaded into the C7 are  listed     Confirm the input l  The C7 starts again and shows all    with    R language dependent text in the  ENTER  new language        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  6 20 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     6 5 1 Changing Parameters On line    Overview You can change the parameters which were set by the configuration  on line   using the C7 OP     Changing the You can change the parameters for the C7 OP interfaces via the standard  Interface screens  The procedure is outlined below   Parameters    The result is dependent on the  individual C7 and the chosen  configuration           Depending on which C7 system you are  using  choose the screen level System setting     system settings    from the basic menu     IF IF2A B                   Shown here is one of the standard  screens with SYSTEM     IF              Using the arrow keys  scroll through the  parameter list on the display to the Baud rate  required parameter  Data bits  Some of the parameters displayed cannot Stop bits    be modified  Parity                      Choose the value for the parameter by New parameter is set   using a symbolic value  to be configured  in advance      Accept the changed parameter If a password 
100. Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       Diagnostics    In this Chapter    In this section  you will learn which diagnostics messages you can select and  the layout of the diagnostics buffer     The diagnostics of the C7 analog I O are described     This chapter contains a statement of how you can correct the reported error    for the most important diagnostics messages of C7 analog I O with universal  inputs     The term    module    refers here to a unit consisting of the analog I O and the  universal inputs     Section Diagnostics Message Page             5 1 Diagnostics Messages 5 2   5 2 Diagnostics Data of the C7 Analog I O and Uni  5 4  versal Inputs   33 Constraints and Interactions of the Diagnostics 5 8  Evaluation          C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01 5 1       Diagnostics    5 1 Diagnostics Messages    Overview    Advantages    Diagnostics  Events    C7 CPU I O    Diagnostics    Assign I O  Diagnostics  Parameters    5 2    The C7 CPU possesses a diagnostics buffer in which detailed information is  provided for all diagnostics events are recorded in the sequence of their  occurrence  The contents of the diagnostics buffer is preserved even after a  complete erasure of the C7 CPU  The diagnostics entries in the diagnostics  buffer can be read and interpreted by the applications program     Errors in the system can be evaluated after a long time delay using the  diagnostics buffer in order be able to identify the cause of e  g  a STOP or to  t
101. T LED goes out     Contrast You can also adjust the contrast of the LCD display using the standard  Adjustment via screen  To do this  proceed as follows     Standard Screen    1  Select the standard screen Cursor is positioned on the input  System     Language  field for contrast   2    Select the required contrast value using       the symbolic inputs   1 for the lowest value  16 for the highest  value      3  Leave the standard screen with 7 You change back to the previous  ESC screen level        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 25    Operating the C7  General     6 6 Password Protection    Overview To prevent unauthorized operation of the C7  it is possible to protect access  to certain functions and inputs  by means of passwords and password levels     When an operator is issued a password s he is simultaneously granted  permission to execute functions at a specific password level     A password and password level are defined during the configuration     If password protection is implemented you must first log into the system   LOGIN  and then log out  LOGOUT  when finished     Logging into the You can log into the C7 in various ways   C7    e Via the standard screen Password     gt  Login    e By calling a function for which the current password level is too low  In  this case the request for a password automatically appears on the display     Logging in Using To log in using the standard screen  proceed as follows   the Standard  Screen    Sele
102. TR    L RANGE_HEX    DTR     R    T PERCENT          Computing floating point number      L upper limit     calculate floating point number range  L lower limit    _R    L PERCENT     R    L lower limit     R    T actual value     END_FUNCTION    Calling the FC126 An example for calling the FC126 is given in the following   in OB1    Before calling the function block  the range limits must be reassigned to  memory double words  This is necessary to enable using variable values   Normally  upper limit    and lower limit    are fixed values     This can be achieved by setting the upper limit    and    lower limit     parameters in the declaration section of the FC126 to  gt REAL        To enhance  flexibility in a test environment  this variant has been omitted     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 48 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Sequence of Statements in OB1    ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1  var_temp  start_info array  0  19  of byte   end_var   BEGIN     L10 0   T MD4     L  10 0   T MDO     CALL FC 126    lower limit  MD0   upper limit  MD4   channel  PIW272  actual value  MD8 amp       END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    4 6 3 Example for Programming the Counters    Function of Block    The program is intended to implement a simple function which shows the  principle of addressing the counter inputs by the STEP7 program     The counters are implemented to count up until the comparison value is  reached  They are reset when t
103. a is the   Bit keyboard group bit  It serves as a control bit  This bit is set to 1 for every  transfer of the keyboard image  After evaluation of the data area by the  application program  the keyboard group bit should be reset     You can determine whether a block is newly transferred  by regularly reading  the group bits using the application program     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  9 10 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 4 3 LED Image    Data Areas The LED image can be categorized into separate data areas     e Maximum number of data areas  4  e  g  4 different data areas in varions  CPUs     e Total length of all data areas  words      LED Assignment The assignment of the individual LEDs to the data area bits is defined during  the configuration of the function keys  The bit number within the image area  is declared for every LED     The bit number  n  denotes the first of two consequential bits  which can  control four different LED states in total     0 0 Off    Flashing at about 2 Hz    Flashing at about 0 5 Hz       Continually on    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 11    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 5 Screen Number Area    Application    Prerequisite    Requirement    Layout    9 12    The C7 OP stores information concerning the C7 OP   s called up screen in  the screen area number     It is thus possible to transfer information about the current di
104. a screen entry is the two lines in Figure 7 5 pn page 7 17     Furnace 1 temperature  80  C  Furnace 2 temperature  78  C    A screen entry consists of the following components     e Static text    The static text contains explanations for the user  You can also receive  information about the soft key layout         Fields for the output of   e Date  e Time  e C7 CPU setpoints        Fields for the input of C7 CPU setpoints  which are immediately  transferred to the C7 CPU after being entered         Fields for combined input output of C7 CPU setpoints and actual  values     e Soft keys    Different function calls for the different screens are assigned to the soft  keys     The configuration defines the intervals at which C7 CPU values are updated   this means read again from the C7 CPU and shown on the display     With large screens containing more than 159 actual values or setpoint values      Partial screen updating    is automatically enabled  To enhance performance   only the values are updated which are currently present on the display  This  may mean that an older value is briefly displayed when scrolling through  screen entries  Updating of the visible actual values is  however  faster as a  result     7 21    Standard O I Functions    Input and Output  Fields    1 22    Input and output fields have the following properties     Input fields define the setpoints in numeric or symbolic form   The blinking cursor can be seen in input fields     Output fields display actu
105. ace                STEP 7 _   ProTool Lite                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Figure 1 1 Components of the C7    The individual functional units integrated in the SIMATIC C7 correspond to  the modules and devices that can be used in modular configurations  comprising S7 300 CPUs  COROS OPs  etc  The C7   s I O expansion  capability via its IM interface permits the connection of SIMATIC S7 300  modules distributed over three racks with a maximum of 24 S7 300 modules     The general functionality of the C7 also corresponds to a configuration with  standard modules of the PLC and OP ranges  The individual components  operate independently of one another and each processor has a separate  memory     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Introduction    STEP 7 is used for programming the C7 CPU whereas the C7 OP is  programmed with ProTool or ProTool Lite  Both tools run under Windows  either on programming devices or PCs     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 7    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Commissioning  Start Up        In this Chapter In this chapter  you will learn     How the C7 behaves on start up  What you must do if 
106. ady stored on the C7   OP can  be taken from a data record selection list     C7   CPU    stands for data record 0  in the selection list     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Using the transfer  screen    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    Proceed as follows to transfer a data record     bd    Select the standard screen Records     Transfer   Select the recipe in the recipe directory   Position the cursor on the Source field in the transfer screen     Depending on the direction of transfer desired  enter the appropriate  source number  see examples   and confirm       Position the cursor on the Destination field     Depending on the direction of transfer desired  enter the appropriate des   tination number  see examples   and confirm     Position the cursor on the Accept field  and confirm transfer     During the data transfer  an asterisk           is indicated in the acceptance  field       Exit the standard screen with ESCAPE     7 33    Standard O I Functions    7 4 4 Deleting Data Records    How to proceed    7 34    Data records of a recipe can be deleted from the data record directory  These  data records are then no longer available for the recipe     When a data record which is active in the C7   CPU is deleted from the direc   tory of the C7   OP  this data record still continues to be active in the  C7   CPU     Proceed as follows to delete data records     L   2   3     Select Records     Edit i
107. age                         C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  6 14 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     6 4 Entering Values    Overview You enter the values to the C7 by using input fields  There are various types  of values which you enter in various ways     e Numeric values  e Alphanumeric values    e Symbolic values    Input of General In general follow the procedure outlined below     Values    As described on page 6 11  branch ini  The required screen is displayed   tially to the screen you require and then  to the corresponding screen entry     Using the cursor keys  select the input Cursor is positioned on the input  field you require within the screen entry    field     Enter the required value  Depending on   The input field is flashing   the field configuration  you can input the  values listed under    Overview           Confirm your input with E gt  The value is accepted and the  ENTER input display stops flashing     Cancel incorrect input with   4 The original value is automati   ESC cally re entered into the field     Position the cursor with the cursor keys  to the next field and follow the same pro   cedure     You can also use the cursor keys to move  the cursor to the left or right of the pre   vious input field to insert a different  value into it     Close the screen by pressing 2 The display is reset and changed  ESC back to the previous screen        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 15    Operating the C7  General
108. agnostics buffer     Undetected Errors Errors that occur in the process  that is outside the automation system  are not  detected by the system diagnostics  Such errors are for example    motor  failure     These errors fall within the area of the process error diagnostics     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 12 C79000 G7076 C624 01    3 5 4 Parameter Block    Retentive Areas    Definition   Retentivity    Retentivity Without  Buffer Battery    Retentivity of Data  Blocks    Control with the C7 CPU    A memory area is retentive when its contents are retained even after a power  failure and a transition from RUN to STOP  The non retentive areas for the  flags  timers and counters is reset after a power failure and after a transition  STOP   RUN     The following can be retentive   e Flags   e S7 timers   e S7 counters    e Data areas    Areas that you declare to be    retentive areas    in the parameter block will be  preserved without a buffer battery after a power failure and after a transition  from STOP to RUN  The boundary defined for the retentive and   non retentive areas is not influenced by the use of a buffer battery in the C7     You must take note of the following for the retentivity of data areas in data  blocks     e C7 with buffer battery  all data blocks are retentive  This means that a  setting for the retentivity of DBs is not effective so long as the buffer  battery voltage is sufficient     e C7 without buffer battery  the user program is located in the fl
109. aie Mok oe  9 Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU           9 1 Configured Communications Parameters             0 000 cee cece eee es  9 2 Overview of User Data Areas          0 0000 en  9 3 Event and Alarm Messages             0 ceceeee cence eee aarre  9 4 Keyboard and LED Image 9 8  9 4 1 System Keyboard Image 9 9  9 4 2 Function Keyboard Image  10  9 4 3 LE D ITAGO eenean eraa EERE E EE EEE  9 5 Screen Number Area si caine 3 4 wince dag vest alow cniw Bp nannan  9 6 Inteace Area serere seater areas ee eee bre os ee hen e pare aces peered  9 6 1 Control and Checkback BitS          0 0    ccc eee eee ees  9 6 2 Data Areas in the Interface Area            ccc eens  9 6 3 Example for activating a control job          0 0    ccc eee  9 7 PO PO Sg rea whew eg rk S nites Aas ome e oA WO oh aud aah kao Re  9 7 1 Transferring Data Records         0 0 0 ccc ets  9 7 2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records  and the Requisite  Pala Pleas err seeds oeces or auu ee eeuereen beeen re Gen A E A  9 7 3 Synchronization during Transfer     Normal Case                  005   9 7 4 Synchronization during Transfer     Special Cases                  05   9 8 Notes on Optimization         0 0    eee nents    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 V    Contents    A SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU                   B System Status List in the C7 CPU                C C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens   Control Jobs System Messages                  SIMATIC C7 a
110. al     T1    S7 300 M7 300 Programmable Controllers   Module Specifications  Reference Manual     172  S7 300 Programmable Controller  CPU 312 CPU 314  Instruction List     230  Standard Software for S7  Converting STEP 5 Programs  Manual     232  Statement List  STL  for S7 300 and S7 400  Programming  Manual     233  Ladder Logic  LAD  for S7   300 and S7   400  Programming  Manual     235  System Software for S7 300 and S7   400  System and Standard Functions  Reference Manual     280  System Software for M7   300 and M7400  Program Design  Programming Manual    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 D 1    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    In this Appendix    Siemens Worldwide    In this appendix you will find a list of     e All cities in the Federal Republic of Germany with Siemens Sales Offices    and    e All European and non European Siemens Companies and Representatives    SIMATIC Contact in the Federal Republic of Germany    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    Zweigniederlassung    52066 Aachen  AUT P 13  Hr  Georgens  Kurbrunnenstr  22    T  02 41  451 2 52  Fax  02 41  4 51 3 98    86159 Augsburg  AUT  11  Hr  Hirth  Werner von Siemens Str  6       08 21  25 95 4 50  Fax  08 21  25 95 4 08    95448 Bayreuth  AUT P S 11  Fr  Hos   Weiherstr  25    T  09 21  2 81 3 41  Fax  09 21  2 81 4 44  10587 Berlin   AUT P 1  Hr  Liebner  Salzufer 6 8   T  0 30  39 93 23 97  Fax  0 30  39 93 23 02    33605 Bielefeld  AUT P
111. al values of the C7   CPU in numerical or  symbolic form     Up to 256 individual texts can be configured for symbolic input and  output fields  These can be selected via the C7   s selection field  The  selected value is taken     Configured number formats or limit values with respect to the number of  decimal places are valid for numerical input values     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 3 information Text    Overview    Select Information  Text    Display  Information Text       Information text contains information about the current display contents  It is  created during configuration with ProTool Lite and provides additional  information in the language set on the C7  Information text can be configured  for     e Event messages and alarm messages  e Screens   e Screen entries   e Input fields and combined I O fields    Information text can be used to convey information to the user   for example  on the current assignment of the soft keys  Information text relating to an  alarm message may contain such things as additional hints about the possible  cause of the alarm and how to remedy it        o  i  Configured information text is displayed by pressing the key  The  availability of information text is recognized by an illuminated LED     Depending on the cursor position  that is input field  screen  etc    pressing  the HELP key will react in various ways  These are described in Table 7 8     Table 7 8 Explanation    Wh
112. all counters are active     L PIB287     scanning status bits   T status    A L20 4     C1 signalled active   A L20 5     C2 signalled active   A L20 6     C3 signalled active   JC run    BEU         Determining counter image  optional      run  NOP 0    L PIW280  Cl   T MW20    L PIW282  U2   TMW22    L PIW284   1 C3   T MW24     END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    OB35 Statement OB35 contains the following statements   i ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB35  var_temp  start_info   array 0  19  of byte   end_var  BEGIN  AN Q1 2     assigned to Cl   Q1 2   AN Q1 3     assigned to C2   Q1 3   AN Q1 4     assigned to C3   Q1 4   L QWO     transfer QWO immediately  T PQWO     END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    OB40 Statement OB40 contains the following statements   Sequence    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 52 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB40  var_temp  start_info   array 0  19  of byte   end_var  BEGIN          Determining which input has triggered alarm       AN L8 0     alarm from C1   JC c2     L MB40     counts number of alarms from C1  up to 255   INC 1   T MB40     c2 NOP 0   AN L8 1     alarm from C2   JC c3     L MB41     counts number of alarms from C2  up to 255   INC 1   T MB41     c3 NOP 0   AN L8 2     alarm from C3   BEB     L MB42     counts number of alarms from C3  up to 255   INC 1   T MB42     END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 53    C7 623  C7 624 Control 
113. ange the operating level     Zz  T  e From screen level to message level by pressing the key    e From message level to screen level by pressing the   g      key  ENTER    You cannot branch backward from the message level by pressing ESCAPE   This key is designed to terminate the display of a system message at this  level     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Forced Change to  Message Level    Operating the C7  General     You are automatically exited from the screen level whenever a system  message or an alarm message is waiting to be displayed  The C7 OP then  changes to message level to display the message  You cannot exit from the  message level while a system message or unacknowledged alarm message is  being displayed  The display of an unacknowledged alarm message is  indicated on the C7 OP by the         Alarm message flashing and        Illuminated ACK LED  S     ACK    Use the ACK key for acknowledging an alarm message  Press the ESCAPE  key to fade out a system message     Acknowledging of the alarm message or fading out the system message takes  the C7 OP back to the point where it changed to the message level     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    6      Operating the C7  General     6 3 Operating with the Standard Functions    Overview    Standard Screens    6 8    A standard configuration  which contains standard screens  is supplied with  the configuration software    ProTool        All functions required for the ope
114. ansfer of the date and time from the C7   OP to the C7   CPU  can be ini tiated by means of C7   CPU job 41  These bits are set by  the C7   OP if a new date or a new time is transferred  The bits  must be reset in the S7 program after the date or time has been  evaluated    Bit 7 Scheduler bits  1   New  Scheduler bits are possible only for the C7   624   If the C7   624 has set a new scheduler bit in the interface area  it also  sets the corresponding bit in the control and acknowledge bits  You  therefore need only to poll this bit to detect modification of the  scheduler bits  Following evaluation  the bit has to be reset in the  C7 CPU    Description of The following diagram shows the layout of byte n 1  Afterwards follows the  byte n 1 description of the individual bits   Address  net  7  6 5  4  3  2  1  0     C7 OP Ready bit  C7 OP Operation mode  C7 OP Restart    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  9 14 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    Bit 0 C7 OP restart  1   C7 OP has been started  Bit 0 is reset upon completion of the restart  You can reset the bit  in the C7 CPU program and thus recognize when the C7 OP is  being restarted    Bit 1 C7 OP operation mode  1   C7 OP in off line mode  0   C7 OP in normal mode  Bit 1 is set if the user switches the C7 OP to off line  The bit has a  value 0 in an on line condition    Bit 2 C7 OP ready bit  The C7 OP inverts the ready bit within the interval of 1 second  In  the C7 CPU
115. arameter block   4 10   Output ranges    analo a    Outputs     Index 6    Overflow  alarm message   event message    Overflow warning    Overview   2 10         P    Parameter  analog function   analog input   analog output   C7 CPU   Parameter assignment  C7 CPU   Parameter asssignment  universal inputs  4 24   Parameter block             cycle behavior     diagnostics  A 8  14 10  4 8       process alarm   real time clock   retentive areas   start up characteristics  3 11   substitute value   system diagnostics   time of day alarms   watchdog alarm   Parameter characteristics  analog inputs   4 9  analog output   4 10  Parameter tools  universal inputs   Parameterizable  events   Parameterization error  4 8  4 10   Partial screen updating                     Password index   Password level    changing   Password list  6 28     displaying     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Password management   6 28    Password protection   6 26   Period  G34   Period time counter  parameter     parametering   Period time counts   4 36    Period time measurement   4 36  Period times  clocks   Permanent  diagnostics error   PG Functions  STATUS VAR   STEUERN VAR  7 35  PG Functions  MODIFY VAR   STATUS VAR   C 5  PLC job  C 13   print production report   print recipe   select directory     select recipe   set contrast                  POWER ON   Power supply  error     Print  alarm messages   event messages   ag re eal  recipe   start  7  Printer  changing parameters
116. ash  memory         The data blocks for which a retentive area has been set must be  programmed in the flash memory     Data blocks or data areas that you generate with the SFC 22     CREATE_DB    are not retentive         The retentive data areas are preserved after a power failure  The  contents programmed in the flash memory are held in the  non retentive data areas     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    3 13    Control with the C7 CPU    Parameter Block Table 3 9 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Retentive areas     The     Retentive Areas    retentive area for all areas  flags  timers  counters and data bytes  may not be  larger than for the sum of all the parameters listed in Table 3 9     Table 3 9 Parameter Block       Retentive Areas       Parameter Explanation Value Range Default  C7 Setting  Memory bytes The parameter value entry is the number of retentive 0 to 256 16  memory bytes from memory byte 0  S7 timers The parameter value entry is the number of retentive S7 0 to 128  timers from timer O  space req   2 bytes timer   S7 counters The parameter value entry is the number of retentive S7 0 to 64  counters from counter 0  space req   2 bytes timer              Data areas Max  8 data areas may be retentive with a maximum of Yes No  e Data block number   4996 bytes  The start address of the data area   the num   e From 1 e    ber of data bytes may not exceed 8191  to 127  e Number of bytes e  6From 0 e 0  to 4096  e Byte address 
117. ata     Temporary    Default Setting    Diagnosis    Diagnostic Events    Diagnostic  Functions    Diagnostic  Interrupt    Display    Display Duration    Glossary 4    It is used for triggering a function in the C7     Counters are component parts of the     C7 CPU  The contents of the  counter cells    can be changed by means of STEP 7 instructions  for  example  upward downward counting      Data blocks  DB  are data areas in the user program  which contain user data   Global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks and instance data  blocks are assigned to a specific FB call     Static data are data which are used only within a function block  These data  are stored in an instance data block belonging to the function block  The data  stored in the instance data block are retained until the next function block  call     Temporary data are local data of a block that are stored in the L stack during  execution of the block and that are not retained after the execution     The default setting comprises generally applicable basic settings which are  used whenever no other values are specified         gt  Diagnostic Functions      System Diagnosis    Modules with diagnostics capability signal any system fault to the     gt  C7  CPU via diagnostic interrupts     Diagnostic functions comprise the complete scope of system diagnostics and  the detection  evaluation and signalling of faults within the C7     Modules with diagnostics capability signal system errors to the     g
118. ate and time  proceed as follows     From the basic screen choose System  and the screen level    system settings           Select the standard screen Date Time        Date  Fr 01 01 95  Time  01 30 40                         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 23    Operating the C7  General     Set the weekday with the keys    3  Confirm input with E gt   ENTER  4  With the keys  o or Cursor jumps to the date field or  SHIFT bic    position the cursor to the right or to the  left in the date field     Enter the date with a numerical input    First press the Shift key   Change between date and time with   Cursor is positioned on the time  the cursor keys  field     5   fe Carry out the procedure described in Step 4    5 Confirm with eS New parameter is set   ENTER  ha Leave the standard screen with Previous screen setting appears   ESC       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  6 24 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     6 5 2 Contrast Adjustment    Overview You can adjust the contrast of the C7   s LCD  The display contrast can be  adjusted either by     e Direct adjustment or via a    e Standard screen    Direct Contrast The display contrast of the LCD can be adjusted using the system keyboard     Adjustment    ka Press the Koy  Sr The SHIFT LED lights up     Adjust the cons The contrast changes for as long    as the key is pressed     to the required value p pressing the key   either a single key press or continually     Press the key The SHIF
119. ating hours counters 65 us  In the C7   CPU  you can set 1 operating hours counter   seo le   CTRL_RTM Starting and stopping the operating hours counter   SSus     SSus    me READ_RTM Reading the operating hours counter    SFC 64 TIME_TICK Reading out the system time 45 us  You can read out the system time with an exactness in the ms  range     Block Functions The following table contains system functions for copying and setting array  default variables     SFC 20 BLKMOV Copying variable of random type 90 us    2 us byte  SFC 21 FILL Setting array default variables 90 us    3 2 us byte    Creating a You create a data block using SFC 22    CREAT_DB      Data Block             SFC 22 CREAT_DB Generate a data block of specified length in a specified 110 us  3 5 us  area per DB in the  specified area    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  A 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU    Time of Day You can use the time of day interrupts for program processing controlled by  Interrupt the C7   CPU internal real time clock   Functions    SET_TINT Setting the times for a time of day interrupt 190 us    CAN_TINT Canceling the times for a time of day interrupt  ACT_TINT Activating a time of day interrupt  QRY_TINT Querying the status of a time of day interrupt       Delay Interrupts Delay interrupts start the operating system at the end of a specified time     SRT_DINT Start a delay interrupt    CAN_DINT Cancel a delay interrupt  QRY_DINT Query started delay interrupts       C
120. bal data    Cycle time  correction factor  operating  hours counter  date time of day    Set baud rate via the MPI  Features parameters of the module  plugged in   Rack 0   Rack 1   Rack 2   Rack 3    Event information    The information in each case depends  on the event    Module dependent diagnostics  information    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens  C  Control Jobs System Messages    In this Appendix In this appendix  you will obtain information concerning     C7 OP Functionality    Brief Description of Standard Screens    Control Jobs and Their Parameters    System Messages  15       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 1    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    C 1  C7 OP Functionality    Table with List of The table below provides an overview of the functions of C7 623 and C7 624  Functions with their different versions     Table C 1 Functions of C7 623 and C7 624    Display        Design    VE        Lines x characters per line character height  mm  4x20 5 4x20 8 or  8x40 4 5        Contrast control    Event Messages    Maximum number   Maximum length  characters    Display   Print   View event message text   Maximum number of entries in the event buffer  View event buffer   Print event buffer    Delete event buffer    Alarm Messages    Maximum number   Maximum length  characters    Display   Print   View alarm message text   Maximum number of entries in alarm
121. ce Data Functions of the C7 CPU    Overview The C7 CPU offers the possibility to scan the status of the C7 CPU and its  associated signal modules by means of a series of test and reference data  functions  By this method  you can obtain information on the following     e The current layout of the C7   e The current configuration   e The current states   e The current sequences   in the C7 CPU and the associated signal modules     You can also change process variables independently from the user program    Description of the The test and reference data functions can only be executed using the STEP 7  Test and Reference software  The description of the test and reference data functions can be    Data Functions found in the appropriate chapters of the manual  230     List of Test and Table 3 18 contains the reference data functions of the C7 CPU   Reference Data   Functions    Table 3 18 Reference data functions of the C7 CPU    Reference Data Function Application    User memory Display of the current loading of the   e Constants memory  EEPROM   integrated into the C7     Load memory of the C7 CPU  RAM   e Work memory of the C7 CPU  RAM     Blocks Display of all available blocks and the possible priority levels  SFCs  SFBs  OBs  All blocks  Stacks Read out the contents of  B stack  I stack  L stack       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 33    Control with the C7 CPU    Table 3 18 Reference data functions of the C7 CPU  Continued    Reference Data Function 
122. cial Features  with Function  Keys    Special Features  with softkeys    Extended O I Functions    You can assign the following functions to function keys and softkeys   e Branch to screen level   e Select screen   e Start print job   e Display directory contents   e Modify parameters on line    A function key or a softkey can be assigned a password level  This means  that certain functions for example    Modify parameters on line    are only  accessible to authorized persons     An LED integrated in a function key can prompt the operator if he must use  this key for initiating a function in a given situation  The LED is activated by  the C7 CPU     LED       K1             Figure 8 1 Function Key with LED    A bit can be configured in a variable for every softkey  This ensures that a bit  is set in the C7 CPU when a softkey is pressed  In this instance  the C7 OP  always transfers the whole variable to the C7 CPU instead of the individual  bits and overwrites the information it contains     The bit is reset when the key is released  or upon a change of display which  modifies softkey assignment     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    8 3    Extended O I Functions    8 1 1 Self defined Screen Hierarchy    Overview    Example of Screen  Hierarchy Design    8 4       The screen hierarchy can be adapted to system specific requirements and be  modified either in part or in whole  Screens can be removed or added     Screens can be linked together in random or
123. cial screen with  ESC    Leave the standard screen with 2 You change back to the previous  ESC screen level     When the message logging function is active  ON   all alarm and event  messages which occur on line  are printed out  This is also so for alarm  messages upon acknowledgement  You can switch off this logging process by  setting the parameter OUT  The procedure for setting this parameter is  similar to    changing printer parameters        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     Setting First Last To define whether the oldest or the most recent alarm messages  see section  Message Display   7 2 for first last message  is displayed when several are waiting to be  cae proceed as follows     From the basic screen choose System  and the screen level    system settings              Select the standard screen DispMsg     check          Message type  Fir8t                Select the corresponding parameter Password is requested    first or last with    O  SHIFT  and or    EP  operation as described in Step 3  and confirm     ee sel    Setting the Date You can adjust the current date and time on the C7 OP to compensate for   and Time summer or winter time for example  Any change you make will affect all  messages and screens for which a date or time variable has been defined  The  display format for date and time is defined in your configuration and cannot  be changed by means of the menu system on the C7 OP        To change the d
124. cocha   C  P  10 800   T  591 iB 35 44 45   Fax  591  2  37 03 97    Brasilien    05110 900 Sao Paulo  SP  Pinituba  MAXITEC S A   AUT PA  Hr  F  Rocco    Avenida Mutinga  3650   T  55 W 8 36 29 99   Fax  55  11  8 36 29 50    Chile    Santiago de Chile   INGELSAC Div  Energia  Hr  Browne  Avda  Holanda 64  Cas  242 V  T  56 3 2 31 00 00   Fax  56  2  2 32 66 88    Costa Rica    San Jose 1000   Siemens S A  San Jose  Division  Energia y Automatizacion  VAT   Hr  Ferraro    La Uruca  Apartado 100 22    5 06 87 50 50   Fax  5 06 21 50 50       Ecuador    Quito   Siemens S A   Dept  DEA    Hr  J  Guerra   Calle Manuel Zambrano y   Panamericana Norte km 2 1 2   Casilla de Correos 17 01 3580   5 93 3 47 40 60   M 2  40 77 38       El Salvador    San Salvador  Siemens S A   E A  Hr  M  Dubon  43  Calle Siemens  parque Industrial Sta  Elena  Apartado 1525    5 03 78 33 33  Fax  5 03 78 33 34    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Guatemala    Ciudad de Guatemala   Siemens S A   EA AUT  Hr  Godoy  2a Calle 6 76   Zona 10  pas 1959   T o 34 3670   Fax  5 02  2  34 36 70    Kanada    Mississauga  ON L5N 7AG  Siemens Electric Ltd   Dept  SL 20   Hr  Fred Leon  2185 Derry Road    West  T  1 ees 7 92 81 95 82  Fax  1  905  58 19 58 12    Point Claire  QUE H9R 4R6  Siemens Electric Ltd   Hr  D  Goulet  7300 Trans Canada Highway   B  1 514 426609   Fax  1  514  4 26 61 44    Burnaby  B  C  V5J 5J1   Siemens Electic Ltd   Hr  A  Mazurek  Marine Way Business Park   887
125. control value       619 Re load ProTool Lite  repeat    download of configuration    ProTool Lite error  data structure for presetting of  setpoint       620 Wrong parameter transferred by ProTool Lite Repeat download of configuration     function keyboard       621 Wrong parameter transferred by ProTool Lite Set required value by means of   message type  standard screen or controller      622 Configured recipe does not fit in the C7   CPU recipe  mailbox  more than 256 data words     623 See Internal Errors      624 No recipe entries available       625    Invalid recipe number in control job or function area     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems   24 C79000 G7076 C624 01    O    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      628 The recipe does not fit into the boxes  LU      629 LED image area too small Enlarge LED image area according to  configured bit offsets     630 Keyboard image area too small Enlarge image area according to  configured bit offsets    Message configuration x is incomplete or incorrect  Add to configuration and repeat  download  x variable   1 2 The triggered alarm is not configured  3 The process connection is only set up symboli     cally  The actual value field is only set up symbolically  The triggered event message is not configured  The symbolic actual value field is only set up  symbolically  21   24 Field texts do not exist for the symbolic actual  value  25 Field type not permitted  8   20 Internal error     Message with 
126. copied via the standard screen Records     Edit     2  Instead of changing a value in the data record  exit the displayed data re   cord again immediately by pressing ENTER     When the standard screen is exited  you will be asked whether you want  to save the data record regardless of whether values have been changed or  not     3  Position cursor in the field for the data record number  enter the number   and confirm     4  Position cursor in the field for the data record name  enter the name  and  confirm     The next time you call the data record directory  you will find the new data  record in the list     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 4 3 Transferring Data Records    Overview A transfer screen offering the following functions is available for transferring  data records     e C7 OP     C7 CPU    Before a changed or newly set up data record in a recipe can become ef   fective in the PLC  it must first be transferred via data record transfer to  the C7   CPU     e C7 CPU     C7 OP    Transfer the data record which is active in the C7   CPU to the C7   OP  under a new number and a new name     e C7 OP     C7 OP    Copy an already existing data record on the C7   OP        Transfer screen The transfer screen is called via Records     Transfer  It is shown below   a      1  No  of the source data record  No  of the destination data record  DOUrCe    ta Pest       3  The recipe data record active in  7   the PLC  Cee  P  4 
127. ct the standard screen The password input mask   Password     Login  appears on the display  This  mask appears automatically on  the display every time a function  is called for which the current  password level is too low  The  cursor is positioned on the first  input field     Enter the password using the system After entering each character  the  keyboard and then press cursor automatically jumps to the  ENTER next field  Every character input   is shown as asterisk         For valid passwords  the  corresponding password level is  indicated     3  Close the screen with   You change back to the previous  ESC password level     Logging out of the Select the standard screen Password     Logout  Upon selection of the  C7 standard screen  the C7 switches from the current password level to the  lowest password level  level 0  and branches to the message level        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  6 26 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     Automatic Call If a function requires a higher password level than the current one  you are  automatically requested to enter a suitable password when the function is  called     After entering the password  you return to the calling function by pressing    4    ESC    6 6 1 Password Level and Access Rights    Password Level During configuration  you assign hierarchically ascending password levels  from 0 to 9 for functions called by function keys  soft keys and  input fields  The password levels assigned to the standard scre
128. d     1  First  the setpoint is related to the total range  RANGE_DEC  resulting  from the difference  upper limit     lower limit      The result is a percentage of the absolute setpoint value  This is identical  in the floating point number and in the hexadecimal representation     2  Then the total range  RANGE_DEC   resulting from the difference  UL      LL  is calculated in hexadecimal representation  depending on the  measuring range being unipolar or bipolar     3  Now the percentage  PERCENT  calculated before is related to the total  hexadecimal range  RANGE_HEX      The result is the absolute value to be output   4  Finally  the lower limit  LL  is added to this value as offset     5  The resulting bit pattern is output     PERCENT    setpoint     lower limit     upper limit     lower limit   RANGE_DEC   upper limit     lower limit   RANGE_HEX   UL   LL   Channel   PERCENT   RANGE _ HEX   LL    The FC127 function block contains the following statement lines     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    FUNCTION FC 127  void    var_input  lower limit  DWORD  upper limit  DWORD  setpoint  DWORD  end_var  var_temp  LL   DWORD  UL   DWORD  RANGE_DEC   DWORD  RANGE_HEX   DWORD  PERCENT   DWORD  end_var  BEGIN       Case  unipolar or bipolar measuring range      L lower limit     lower limit negative   L 0 0     yes   gt  bipolar measuring range   lt R   JC bipo   L DW 16 0000_0000    un
129. d  the programmable controller  There are digital input and outputs as well as  analog inputs and outputs  The integral universal inputs have special  functions in the C7  interrupt counter inputs      With SIMATIC S7  a code block is a block containing part of the STEP 7  user program   In contrast to a     gt  Data Block  which contains only data      Point of time at which the C7 triggers a message output     Communication processors are modules for point to point and bus  connections     When a central processing unit starts up  for example  after selecting a C7  CPU mode in the system functions menu or on power ON   organization  block OB 100  complete restart  is executed prior to the cyclic program  processing  OB 1   On a complete restart  the process image input table is  read in and the STEP 7 user program is executed starting with the first  instruction in OB 1     The PG online function    Compress       is used to shift all valid blocks in the  RAM of the C7 CPU evenly and without any gaps to the beginning of the  user memory  All gaps caused by deleting or correcting of blocks are thus  removed     Defining plant specific defaults  messages and displays using the  ProTool Lite configuring software     The configuration memory is a flash memory integrated in the C7 OP  It is  used for storing the configuring data     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary 3    Glossary    Control Job    Counters    D    Data Block    Data   Static    D
130. d in the C7 OP as having    departed        Table KEIN MERKER represents the number of message areas for event and  alarm messages and alarm acknowledgement areas  as well as the total length  of all areas  for both the C7 623 and the C7 624     Table 9 2 Message Areas of the C7 OP    Device Event message bit area Alarm message area and alarm mes   sage acknowledgement area    Length  words  Number of   Total length of each    type  words        A message can be configured for every bit in the configured message area   The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending sequence     Example   The following event message area is configured for the C7 CPU   DB 60 Address 42 Length 5  in words     Figure 9 1 shows the assignment of all 80  5 x 16  message numbers to the  individual bit numbers in the control event message area     The assignment follows automatically in the C7 OP           7 O  7 0  DB6o DBw42 tie                      tt   4             Message number       Figure 9 1 Assignment of Message Bit and Message Number    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    Acknowledgement As alarm messages indicate faulty behavior of some sort  these must be  acknowledged   Acknowledgement follows either by    e Appropriate action on the C7 or    e By setting a bit in the acknowledgement area of the C7 CPU     Acknowledgement If the C7 CPU is to be informed about an acknowledgement of an alarm  
131. d level  Password level will be evaluated  1  Password level will not be evaluated    Parameter 2 n 8  First key code  n 9  Second key code    Function keys  F1  1     F16 16    System keyboard C7    Parameter 3   For keyboard emulation via a control job  please pay attention   to the transfer time from the C7 CPU to the C7 OP    For example     The acknowledgement of an alarm message by   keyboard emulation on the C7 CPU can lead to an undesired   result          if the alarm message in question has already been acknowledged  by the C7 or  if anew alarm message or system message arrives before the job  has been evaluated        Control Job with If the cursor lock parameter is not equal to zero in one of the jobs 11  51  53   Cursor Lock 72 and 73  the selected input field cannot be left using the cursor keys or the  BREAK key  The cursor lock will first be released     e upon repeating the job with cursor lock   0  e or upon execution of another job which causes a change of the display     If you try and leave the input field when the cursor is locked  you will  receive the system message   400 Invalid input        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 14 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    C 4 System Messages    Introduction This chapter provides on overview of the most important system message  with their causes and the action required to remedy the errors     Message Number System messages on the OP can be placed in dif
132. d then specify    321 level    322 Password must contain at least 3  characters   message text   though an entry does  not exist for the current message       324 The screen number or entry number in your input does  not exist       335 Confirmation of alarm message inhibit      336 Printer cannot be addressed Check printer and connection to C7    337    338    Current password level too low for required operator Log in at higher password level       input         323    In a buffer mask  you pressed            339 Communication with controller resumed      340 You cannot operate the C7 with status function  running on programming device      341 Internal error    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems   20 C79000 G7076 C624 01    O    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    This message indicates a data block error  Variables x and  y are used to identify the cause of the error  variable x   and the number of the receive block  variable y      Variable x   0 Wrong block length entered in receive block no  y  1 Wrong number entered in receive block no  y    Correct the required block length or block number or  send the correct data block     Recipe transfer in progress  During this time  the operator  panel is not ready for operator inputs     Possible cause  The PLC has not reset the corresponding  control checkback bit which cancels the recipe inhibit  state in DB   TDOP        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 21    C7 OP Functiona
133. dard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    C 2 Brief Description of Standard Screens    Introduction The table below presents an overview of all the standards screens for the  units C7 623 and C7 624  As well as a brief comment on each function   mention is made of the required password level  The    Level 1    column lists  the screens that you can choose from the basic screen  These screens allow  you to make different calls  which are listed under    Level 2        The T detailed here relates to the supplied example configuration     see section 63     Table C 2 Overview of Standard Screens    Level 1 Level 2 Function Password   Level   Alarm Msg   View e Display alarm messages in alarm message buffer  e Display message text for a message selected in the alarm message buffer   Alarm Msg   Print Print alarm messages chronologically  that is all message events  arriving  2  departing  acknowledged  in the order of their occurrence    Alarm Msg   Number Display messages in the buffer  differentiating between    All Messages    and   Pending Messages       Alarm Msg Delete all acknowledged and departed messages in the alarm message buffer   6  Alarm Msg Switch on off system messages at overflow of alarm message buffer  Alarm Msg Display all alrm messages texts rz    Event Msg View e Display event messages in event message buffer  e Display message text for a message selected in the event message buffer  Event Msg Print Print event messages chronologically  that is all events
134. de change      133 Mode change      135 Mode change      136 No response from controller     Check program execution in controller or physical  connection      138 Data block no  x not available in controller memory   Create   memory space        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 1    N    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Backup battery voltage has fallen below minimum Replace battery  value or   wrong battery type inserted    Error during clock chip write  hardware error  Return device for repair  Error when reading date Re enter date    return C7 for repair   Error when reading time Re enter time    return C7 for repair   Error when reading day Re enter day    return C7 for repair     Printer not ready and internal storage of print jobs is Ready printer or disable  no longer possible message log   capactity exceeded       206 Printer not ready  print job will be stored temporarily Ready printer    207 Print job was aborted Check printer  cable and connector      210 Internal error Refer to Action for internal  errors     212 Internal error Refer to Action for internal  errors      213 Off line mode not possible at present Try mode change again later    214 The job number configured by the C7 CPU or in a Check user program and  screen  is too large configured procress screen    217 The addresses of two variables overlap Modify configuration  variable     218    220 Printer buffer overflow  messages have been lost    22
135. declaration section  of OB 40  You have to  evaluate the additional information Z1 to Z3 in the start information     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 18 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Declaration The entries in the declaration section of OB 40 are listed in Table 4 14  The  Section of OB 40 bytes relevant to the user are hatched in the Table     Table 4 14 Declaration Section of OB 40    o_  eas  ene earner  C a   i  i    OOO noo p  Time tag of event       Additional Additional information Z1 contains the initial address of the C7 I O module  Information Z1  bytes 6 7      Address  272 or 01104  Additional Bit 4 of byte 8   1 in the case of an end   of   cycle alarm   Information Z2    Additional Additional information Z3 is not used and assigned the value 0000H   Information Z3    Evaluation in the The evaluation of process alarms in the user program is described in the  User Program Manual  234      C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 19    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 Use and Function of the Universal Inputs    In this Section In this chapter you can find     Basic terminology about the function of the universal inputs  How you can use the universal inputs    How you can address and assign parameters to the universal inputs    4 4 1 Addressing Universal Inputs    Overview You can select the following functions by assigning the appropriate  
136. deleted and modified  on the C7   OP  The data are stored on the C7   OP  thus saving memory on the  C7 CPU     The use of recipes insures that  when a data record is transferred to the  C7    CPU  several items of data are transferred to the S7 together and in a  synchronized fashion     Data records can be transferred from the C7   OP to the C7   CPU or from the  C7    CPU to the C7   OP  You transfer data records from the C7   OP to the  C7 CPU to set specific values on the C7   CPU     for example  to produce  orange juice  It is similarly possible to fetch data from the C7   CPU and to  store them on the C7   OP as a data record to save  say  a favorable assign   ment of values     To insure a coordinated procedure for transferring data records and to prevent  any uncontrolled overwriting of data  bits are set in control and response byte 3  of the interface area     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    9 19    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 7 1 Transferring Data Records    Ubersicht When a data record is written  the variables in the data record are written  directly to the defined addresses concerned  With direct reading  the variables  are read into the C7   OP from the system memories of the C7   CPU     With ProTool  the variables must have a direct link to the C7   CPU and the  write directly attribute for direct transfer  Variables not having an as   signed address on the C7   CPU are not transferred     9 7
137. departure  alarm  messages also upon acknowledgement   if this was set during the message  configuration  System messages are not logged directly     If direct message logging follows another print function  the header of the  direct message log is re printed     If the printer is disabled  not ready or assigned to another print function  up  to 16 messages are stored temporarily  Temporary storage of the messages for  the message log is independent of the message buffer concerned     Direct message printing can be enabled and disabled on line by means of a  standard screen     From the basic screen select System then     System Settings             Select the standard screen Printer     Characters   line s0  Lines   page 72                Message logging    Position the cursor on    Message log  Cursor is positioned on message  ging     logging     Select the corresponding parameter Password is requested          ON or OFF with    O  SHIFT  and or    Please repeat operation as in Step 3 and  acknowledge   Confirm with  sA    mi Leave the standard screen with Basic screen is displayed again     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       Standard O I Functions    Printing the You can print messages from the alarm and event message buffers  but not  Message Buffer from the system buffer     e Chronologically  this means all messages contained in the buffer of the  message type concerned are printed in the order in which they are situated  in the buffer     e A
138. der  The design  sequence of the  link  inclusion in the screen directory and the relevant cross jump  destinations are defined during configuration with ProTool or ProTool Lite     You branch between the different screens by means of softkeys and  configured cross jump destinations  Branching from entries of different  screens to one and the same screen is also possible  see Figure 8 2    Cross jumps are not restricted to screen level  but can branch to the message  level too     Another feature that can be configured is the choice of picture that you want  to display on the C7 as your start screen        Screen 1  Start screen    a       _    Figure 8 2 Principle of Screen Hierarchy    In the following section you will receive  by way of example  an overview of  a screen hierarchy design  For exact details with respect to the configuration   please refer to the ProTool or ProTool Lite user manual     Example     The C7 is used to operate and monitor a system for producing and bottling  different fruit juices  The system basically consists of a mixing unit and a  bottling machine     Mixing unit The ingredients of the fruit juices are contained in three  tanks    Depending on the juice that you wish to manufacture   ingredi    ents are mixed in certain proportions     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Extended O I Functions    Bottling machine After the fruit juice has been mixed  it flows into the bot     tling  tank after a valve has been opened  and 
139. dit       Print                   Data records   Record     Edit          Change                Transfer                      System Settings   System     Operating mode  Op  mode           Display message  DispMsg             System messages  SysMsg         Change language  Language        Date Time  Date Time        Printer parameters  Printer                 Status Variable   StatVAR     Interface parameters  IF1 IF2                    Force Variable   ForceVAR              Edit Password     Password                                Hierarchy of Standard Screens in the Example Configuration  The    Labels    in     are the Actual Messages Which Appear on the Display     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     Branching in You change from message level to screen level with the key  Here you  Standard Screens can control and monitor the process or installation by means of suitable    screens as well as perform system settings     Example With reference to the standard screens  a description of the procedure for  branching between individual screens within the screen hierarchy is provided  below     Call up the basic screen from Its full name is displayed in the first   the supplied standard screens  line  Depending on the C7 version  and display size concerned  the next  lines include a different number of  text elements of the current entry   These text elements indicate the  name of other standard screens to  which you can branch
140. dress of an analog channel is always a word address     Addresses An analog input output has the same start address for the analog input and    output channels     Figure 4 3 shows which channel addresses result  You can see that for the  analog I O  the analog input channel and the analog output channel are  addressed starting from the same address           View of right hand side of C7    Analog inputs  Al1   Channel 0  Address PIW272  Al1 M    Al2 U  Al2   Channel 1  Address PIW274    Al2 M       000000000000  o000000000000    AI3 M    Al4 U  Al4     Al4 M  MANA Analog output    ioa Channel 0  Address PQW272    Al3 U  Al3   Channel 2  Address PIW276  Channel 3  Address PIW278          0000000  4 00000000          Inputs marked with this  hatching are not relevant to  this example    Pin number             Figure 4 3 Analog Input Output Addresses    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 2   Parameter Assignment for Analog I O    Overview This chapter contains an overview of the analog I O and their parameters   Parameter You set the parameters for the analog I O using the S7 Hardware  Assignment configuration  A parameter block is generated that contains all selected    peripheral parameters  After loading the SDB parameter  the parameters are  not immediately transferred to the analog I O  The C7 CPU then transfers the  parameters to the respective analog I O after every mode
141. dressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output           4 1 Slot Oriented Address Assignment for Signal Modules                  4 3    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems 7  C79000 G7076 C624 01 i    Contents       4 2 Addressing the C7 W O    cece n en enes  4 3 Use and Function of C7 Analog I O    0    1  nes  4 3 1 Addressing Analog I O     1    cece nen tenn nnes  4 3 2 Parameter Assignment for Analog I O            0    0c ccc eee  4 3 3 Representation of Analog Values            0 0 0 ccc eee  4 3 4 Representation of Analog Values for the Measurement Ranges of    Ne ANAIOG NPU ay as 689d em mk eee Boe as  OA are ten a a ee 2 OS  4 3 5 Representation of Analog Values for the Output Range of   the Analog QUTOUTS ce ccs renden Saree ae i ae i aae SSG ee saan dae  4 3 6 Conversion and Cycle Time of Analog I O             00  eee eee  4 3 7 Conversion  Cycle  Settling and Response Times of Analog Outputs       4 3 8 Behaviour of Analog VO    2    cette teens  4 3 9 Time Alarm Alarm Cycle        0    c ccc eee eee een ees  4 4 Use and Function of the Universal Inputs             02 0 0    00  eee  4 4 1 Addressing Universal Inputs             0 00  cece eee eee nes  4 4 2 Parameter Assignment of Universal Inputs                   00 eee  4 4 3 Alarm Inputs          0 00 cc ee ete n eee t nee nees  4 4 4 Sorini cee E E E E E E E  4 4 5 Counter Alarms        nannaa aunan eee eee eee eens  4 4 6 Frequency Counters         00 00 eee ene en ene  4 4 7 Period Time 
142. dressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Diagram with The pins and associated addresses are shown in the diagram   Universal Inputs          0o00000000000  o000000000000    Universal inputs             Ground  DI X1  DI X2  DI X3  DI X4    ooo0oo0000  oo0oo0o00000               Not used          Inputs marked with this  hatching are not relevant to  Pin number this example                 Figure 4 6 Pins of Universal Inputs    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 23    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 2 Parameter Assignment of Universal Inputs    Parameter Block In parameter block       universal inputs    you set the parameters for   Universal Inputs s Theanine  e The counters   e The frequency meter period time counter    e Digital input  always if alarm or count input   deactivated     Parameter You set the parameters for the universal inputs using the STEP 7 function   Assignment Hardware configuration  A parameter block is generated which contains all  currently selected parameters of the universal inputs  After loading this  parameter block  the C7 CPU then transfers the parameters to the appropriate  universal inputs at every transition from STOP     RUN     Alarm Inputs If the universal inputs are used as alarm inputs  a process alarm will be  triggered at the C7 CPU for the assigned rising or falling edge at the input   The default is the rising edge     Counter Inputs The uni
143. duction The universal inputs counters can be assigned parameters for process alarm   In this case  a forward counter triggers a process alarm when it reaches the  comparison value  and a backward counter when it passes through zero     Assignable Events The parameter assignment is performed with the STEP 7 Function Hardware  configuration     Process Alarm OB If a process alarm from the counter is sent to the C7 CPU  then the process  alarm OB  OB 40  to the C7 CPU will be called  The event that called the  OB 40 is stored in the start information  declaration section  of the OB 40   You must evaluate the additional information C1 to C3 in the start    information   Declaration The entries in the declaration section of OB 40 can be found in Table 4 21   Section of OB 40 the bytes that are relevant to the user are hatched in the table     Table 4 21 Declaration Section of OB 40     eas  ener Beem  C Aaionatinomaionzs   i      Additional information Z2 so  Additional information Z3  Time stamp of event eo        Additional The start address of the C7 peripheral module is contained in the additional  Information Z1 information Z1  byte 6 7    Address  272 or 01104    Additional The serial number of the universal inputs that triggered the process alarm can    Information Z2 be found in byte 8 of the additional information Z2  Byte 9 is irrelevant     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 31    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output  
144. e  OB1 is ended if  not all counters are activated     If all counters are active  the read counter values are reassigned  This is  an optional feature which can be useful for specific applications  If the  same value must always be used within an OB1 cycle  re   assignment is  recommended  for example in the case of high counting frequency and  relatively long cycles  gt  more than one accesses in OB1 might supply  different values      5  OB40  This block is used for alarm evaluation  A jump is executed by evaluating  the information of the alarm vector register from the start information of  OB40  LB 8   A memory byte is incremented as a function of the counter  which has triggered the alarm  OB40 is programmed to recognize even  several quasi   parallel alarms     6  OB35  OB35 is used to generate the count pulses  The following wiring is  required to execute the example     Connect digital output 1 2 with DI X1  Connect digital output 1 3  with DI xX2  Connect digital output 1 4 with DI X3    In OB35  the output bits of the C7 digital outputs are toggled  and the  effect is a period time of 200 ms at each output  correponding to a  frequency of 5 Hz  This value results from the 100 ms default alarm time  of OB35  This means that each output is set to logic    1    for 100 ms and  then  also for 100 ms  reset to logic    0        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 50 C79000 G7076 C624 01    S7 Status    OB100 Statement  Sequence    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Func
145. e C7   OP  If bit O is set to 1    data mailbox dis   abled   the transfer is terminated with a system error message  If bit O is set  to 0  the C7   OP sets the bit to 1     The C7    OP enters the identifications in the data mailbox     With an indirectly transferred data record  the data record values are also  written to the data mailbox  With a directly transferred data record  the  values of the variables are written to the configured address     The OP sets bit 3 to 1    data transfer terminated      The data record or the variable can be evaluated in the C7   CPU program   You then have to acknowledge in the C7   CPU program whether the trans   fer was error free or erroneous    Error free  bit 2 is set to 1   Erroneous  bit 1 is set to 1    Reset bit 0 in the C7   CPU program     e   The C7 OP resets the bits set in step 3 and step 4        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 21    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 7 4 Synchronization during Transfer     Special Cases    Transfer C7   OP     gt  Make sure with this type of transfer that the current variables on the C7   OP    C7    CPU are transferred  The values are not read directly from the data medium    initiated by  CEN Table 9 5 Procedure for Transmission    Erklarung  fo In the S7 program  request the data mailbox lockout by setting bit 6 to 1     a If lockout is possible  the C7   OP sets bit O to 1 and simultaneously resets  bit 6 to 0     In the S7 progra
146. e assigned once only                                                                      and in one CPU   Keyboard image   Bit number  7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 54 3 2 1      tel  SAT GSE ms    f  S  ak  F E D C  B A  7 9 8 7 6 5   4 3 2 1 0     Keyboard group bit 2nd word  1st word    Note    Unused bits may not be overwritten by the application program     Keyboard Group The keyboard group bit serves as the control bit  It is set to the value 1 for  Bit each transfer of the keyboard image from C7 OP to C7 CPU  After  evaluation of the data area by the application program  it should be reset     By regular reading of the group bits  you can determine in the application  program  whether the image of the system keyboard has been newly  transferred     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 9    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 4 2 Function Keyboard Image    Data Areas The image of the function keyboard can be categorized into separate data  areas     e Maximum number of data areas   4    e Total length of all data areas  words    4    Key Assignment The assignment of the individual keys to the data area bits is defined during  the configuration of the function keys  The number within the image area is  declared for every key     The function keyboard image must also be declared in the configuration   under    area pointer  type  function keyboard        Keyboard Group The most significant bit in the last data word of every data are
147. e cursor within  the input field for date or time         The day of the week is set via a symbolic entry   3  Confirm entry with ENTER     The scheduler is now activated     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    8 9    Extended O I Functions    Deactivating You can delete the scheduler time in a screen entry by pressing the DELETE  schedulers key  The scheduler is then deactivated  1 e   the configured function will not  be executed      C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  8 10 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between  the C7 OP and the C7 CPU       In this Chapter In this chapter  you receive information concerning configuration parameters  that are necessary for the communication between the C7 OP and the  C7 CPU     The communication is achieved using two data areas   e The user data area   and or  e The interface area     The functions  construction and special features of the various user data areas  and the interface areas are described in this chapter     2  Ov  3   4    e     BT   943  ue Imes  3  a A L    9 1 2 Addressing Recipes and Data Records  and the    Requisite Data Areas  Synchronization during Transfer     Normal Case      Synchronization during Transfer     Special Cases  2   98  Rowson Opimizaon E    E  E       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 1    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 1 Configured Communications Parameters    Parameters In the configuration software 
148. easured frequency     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 35    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 7 Period Time Measurement    Overview The universal inputs 3 can be assigned as period time counter  This universal  input reads pulses from a transducer  The transducer could  for example  be  fitted to the barrel extruder of an injection moulding machine     Application Calculation of low frequencies and rotation speeds     Principle The period time counter counts the number of increments  fixed time  intervals  of tzi  0 5us between two rising edges  The first period starts at  the first transition from    0    to    1     rising edge   It ends at the next rising  edge  This is also the start of the next period     From this  a period time can be calculated   tp   number of counted increments   0 5uUs    In addition  for every rising edge  a counter is started that increases its value  by 1 every 0 5us until the next positive edge occurs     The period time counter can be defined with a resolution of 0 5us     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 36 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Explanation of Diagram 4 10 illustrates a simple transducer  The transducer delivers    1     Principle Based when the light passes through one of the slots in the disc  If the discs rotates   upon a Simple then the transducer delivers the signal shown in the diagram    Transduc
149. els should be deactivated in    S7  Configuration    in order to reduce the cycle time     Figure 4 5 illustrates in overview  how the cycle time for a 4 channel analog  input is composed     Conversion time 1  Conversion time 2    Cycle time  max  2 5ms   Calibration measurement    Figure 4 5 Cycle time of an Analog Input       started unless the timed interrupt is initiated  see Section 4 3 2     Alarm Cycle If the alarm cycle mode is parameterized  the new nee se is not    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 15    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 7 Conversion  Cycle  Settling and Response Times of Analog  Outputs    Introduction This chapter contains the definitions and relationships between relevant times  for the analog output     Conversion Time The conversion time includes the acceptance of the digitized output value  from the internal memory and the digital analog conversion     Cycle Time The cycle time  i e  the elapsed time before an analog output value is  converted the next time is equal to the time for the conversion of the one  analog output     Settling Time The settling time  tz to t3   that is the elapsed time between the creation of  the converted value and the attainment of the specific value at the analog  output  is load dependent  One must differentiate between resistive   capacitive and inductive load     Response Time The response time  that is the interval between providing the digital out
150. em oriented channel specific  diagnostics info     Operating mode RUN STOP    Watchdog activated    Rack failure    EEPROM error    ADC error    Process alarm lost    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    1   error occurrence    everything OK  1   watchdog  EPROM  ADC error  1  error at AI or AO    1   with byte O bit 2 and channel specific diagnostic  byte  byte 4        Base condition  standard parameter set   byte 0 bit 0 0          1 with bit O of byte 8 9 10 11 or 15  Standard  parameter for channel set    SM type class  SM type class  SM type class  SM type class    with bit 1 of byte O                Serial calibration EEPROM for analog measured  values calibration  set with bit 1 of byte O           with bit 1 of byte 0       5 5    Diagnostics    Table 5 2 Layout of the Diagnostics Area  Continued     Range   05  0 7  nmre  A  ees  bits per channel  a diagnostics entry AII  Alteration diagnostics entry AI2    Alteration diagnostics entry AI3    Alteration diagnostics entry AI4    Parameter error in parameters for  channel    Wire breack in software O no  1   yes  only for 4  20mA   Measurement underrange 0  no  1   yes  underflow     Measurement overrange 0  no  1   yes  overflow     Parameter error in parameters for  channel    Wire break in software 0 no      yes  only for 4  20mA     Measurement underrange 0  no  1   yes  underflow     Measurement overrange 0  no  1   yes  overflow     Parameter error in parameters for  channel    Wire breack in 
151. ens are  listed in Appendix C I     When an operator is issued a password s he is simultaneously granted  permission to execute functions at a specific password level     Table 6 4 Password Level    Password Explanation  level    At this level  the lowest in the hierarchy  functions are assigned which   when executed  have no or little effect on the course of the process   these are normally calls for functions which have no input options    for example  viewing message buffers     A password is not required to call functions with password level 0     If an operator calls a function of a level other than 0  he is prompted to  enter a suitable password     of the password management responsibilities     Permission to execute functions of password level 9 is solely reserved  for the super user  who has access to all of the C7 functions  Only a  super user is allowed to perform password management     The password for level 9 functions is created at the time of  configuration        1 8 Levels 0 to 8 are assigned to functions with ascending priority   A password level is assigned to a password by the super user as part    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 27    Operating the C7  General     6 6 2 Password Management    Overview    Displaying the  Password List    6 28    Only the super user  password level 9  is authorized to call the functions for  password management  standard screen Password     gt  Edit   Upon delivery  of the C7  the default setting of 
152. er    Slot disc    1st period 2nd period 3rd period                      Increments    Period Time  Counter A  A                              tzi   0 5us                      Z    Counter value Counter value  1st period 2nd period  tp   Counter value   0 5yus       Figure 4 10 Simple Transducer  for example  a Slot Disc on a Shaft    If you know the number of pulses that are delivered by the transducer for  each revolution of the barrel extruder  then you can calculate the speed with  which the barrel extruder is rotating  An example follows     N   16 pulses are generated per revolution of the barrel extruder  N is also  known as the slot number of the transducer   The interval between 2 pulses is  50000 increments  fixed time interval   The rotational speed of the barrel  extruder is calculated as follows     1 1 1 rev  SS SS a   Nx ti 16 x 50 000 x 0 5 us 5 min    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 37    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Lower Threshold The period time counter generates a 24 bit counter value  These 3 bytes can  represent values up to FF FF FFy  16777214 decimal   From this  the lower  threshold frequency for N   1 is  when taking into account the period time  stated below  tp   8 39 s       fu      tp   16777214   0 5us   8 39s  fu   0 119Hz    And for N   1  the lower threshold rotation speed    S eee eee ee l rev  Y Nx ti 1 x 839s E a  Upper Threshold The upper threshold frequency results from 
153. er is output     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 45    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Summary of PERCENT  channel     LL     UL     LL   Formulae RANGE_HEX UL   LL  actual value PERCENT   upper limit     lower limit    lower limit    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 46 C79000 G7076 C624 01    FC126 Sequence  of Statements    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    The FC126 function block contains the following statement lines     FUNCTION FC 126  void    var_input  lower limit  DWORD  upper limit  DWORD  channel  DWORD  end_var  var_output  actual value   DWORD  end_var  var_temp  LL DWORD   RANGE_HEX DWORD   PERCENT DWORD   end_var  BEGIN       Case  unipolar or bipolar measuring range      L lower limit     lower limit negative   L 0 0     yes  gt  bipolar measuring range   lt R   JC bipo   L DW 16 000_00000     unipolar range lower limit  TLL  JU comp   bipo  NOP 0   L W 16 9400     bipolar range lower limit  ITD   TLEL         Computing the range  hexadecimal       comp NOP 0   L W 16 6C00     upper limit for unipolar and bipolar  range     identical  ITD   L LL   _D   T RANGE_HEX     buffer difference    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 47    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output          Relating actual value to total measuring range      L channel     relate input value to total     range   ITD    BEE    D    D
154. ere is the Cursor Explanation    Input or combined If information text exists  illuminated LED   it is   Input Output field displayed by pressing the HELP key  Pressing the  HELP key a second time displays information text  associated with the screen entry  if configured      Field without information If the HELP key is pressed in a field for which   text information text is not available  information text  associated with the screen entry  if configured  is  displayed     Screen You receive the configured information text for a  screen either     e By pressing the HELP key in the directory con   tents   when the cursor is situated on the corresponding  screen     e Or within a screen  when the cursor is positioned  on the  screen title     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    1 23    Standard O I Functions    Browse Leave You can browse through the information text by means of the vertical    Information Text IN VZ  cursor keys and      2g   T  You leave the information text screen by pressing eal The original screen  is then displayed     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 24 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 4 Recipes    Overview Recipes are combinations of variables for a certain purpose  The purpose of  recipes is to transfer data together to the C7   CPU     During configuration  the recipe is used to specify the data structure  This  structure is then assigned with data in the C7   OP  Since multiple assignment  of the data structu
155. erred between PG PC and C7    eeN not Firmware cannot Late a used for current configuration  compatible    EPROM Memory submodule defective  internal hardware error       Return device for repair with details  memory of  failure error    RAM memory  failure    Flash Memory submodule defective or transfer failure Repeat download configuration or  memory return device for repair  failure       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 16 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      006 Error during data transfer in Download mode Check connection  repeat download   message with two variables     VAR  1 Status display    S  zw   N    Internal error  Time out error   Parity error   Framing error   Overrun error   Line interruption  Receive buffer overflow  Wrong control character  Internal error    1  3  5  6  7  8  9  1  1      040 No response from controller        Cable defective or not plugged in     Check physical connection      041 Temporary driver error     Restart PC           Download configuration      100 Invalid RAM contents      104 Download mode canceled by pressing a key      106 Serious error eliminated and key pressed      108 Mode change      110 Mode change      114 Controller cold restart      115 Establishment of logical link      117 Connection to Controller OK again  following a fault      119 Automatic start of C7  password list is not deleted       125 Language changed by standard screen or control job      131 Mo
156. es     Table 4 12 Behaviour of the Analog Input in Relation to the Position of the Analog  Input Value in the Value Range    Ronan  occa     Upper range lower Process value  range    KEIN MERKER       According to parameter assignment     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 17    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Influence of the The behaviour of the analog output is dependent upon the position of the  Value Range for output value within the value range  Table 4 13 illustrates this dependency  the Output for the analog output values     Table 4 13 Behaviour of the Analog Input in Relation to the Position of the Analog  Input Value in the Value Range    Output Value lies Output Diagnostics Alarm  in Value    Roniaranes  ova  sd    Upper range lower C7 value  range       Influence of Errors Errors lead to a diagnostics message and diagnostics alarm if diagnostics  parameters have been assigned  sed Section 2 of the Manual  Chapters 4 3 1  and    4 3 9 Time Alarm Alarm Cycle    Alarm Cycle If the alarm cycle mode is parameterized  the new measuring cycle is not  started unless the time alarm is initiated  see Section 4 3 2      Parameterizable Use the STEP 7 function Hardware configuration for parameter assignment   Events    Process Alarm OB If a process alarm is transferred from the I O to the C7 CPU  the process  alarm OB  OB 40  is called in the C7 CPU  The event which called OB 40 is  stored in the start information  
157. es in the following manner   Modes  Table 2 1 Select C7 CPU Mode    Mode Key Keys Explanation  C7 623 C7 624    The C7 CPU processes the user program   Programs and data can     e Be read out from the C7 CPU with programming device   C7     programming device     e Be transmitted to the C7 CPU  programming device     C7   exception  OB1     The C7 CPU processes the user program   Programs and data in the C7 CPU can be read out using the    programming device  C7     programming device   The pro   gram cannot be loaded or altered  Data cannot be loaded or  altered     The C7 CPU is not processing an user program    Programs can    e Be read from the C7 CPU using the programming device   C7     programming device    e Be transmitted to the C7 CPU  programming device     C7    Note     The operating mode STOP is valid only for the C7 CPU  It is not  valid for the C7 OP  Further processing with the C7 OP is  possible     Memory reset    The memory reset of the C7 CPU  erase memory  reload   user program from flash memory  requires a special operating  sequence of the modes STOP and MRES  see Chapter 2 3    If data that is required in the configuration was destroyed during    the memory reset  then a corresponding error message is issued  by the C7 OP     Note     The MRES position is not a momentary contact state which  means that the MRES status persists  For the C7 CPU  the MRES  status is only a control mode  When this mode is set permanently   the C7 CPU does not function pro
158. esponding alarm message  area     If an alarm message is acknowledged at the C7 OP  the corresponding bit is  set in the acknowledgement area C7 OP     C7 CPU  Thus the S7 can  recognize that the alarm message has been acknowledged     The acknowledgement area C7 OP     C7 CPU can have the same maximum  length as the corresponding alarm message area     The acknowledgement areas may not be larger than the corresponding alarm  message area  It can  however  be configured to be smaller  if it is not  necessary to acknowledge every alarm message  Figure 9 4 clarifies this  case        Alarm message area Reduced alarm message  Alarm messages acknowledgement area  that can be  acknowledged Bit O Bit O       Me ee  Alarm message Bit m  that cannot be  acknowledged             Figure 9 4 Reduced Acknowledgement Area    Note    Allocate important alarm messages  whose acknowledgement is to be  signalled to the C7 CPU in the alarm message area from bit 0 in an  ascending order     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    9 7    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 4 Keyboard and LED Image    Application    Prerequisite    Transfer    Value Allocation    9 8    Key presses on the C7 OP can be transferred to the C7 CPU and evaluated   This way control of an action  for instance switching on a motor  can be  triggered     The LEDs in the C7   s function keys can be controlled  It is therefore possible  to signal the user via a lit up LED  wh
159. est  only for    measurement range 4   20 mA     Measurement    e Type of measurement Deactivated Voltage    Voltage    Current    e Measurement range  10V   20mA  4  20mA    Alarm cycle  e Alarm Yes No    e Alarm time Unsolicited  3ms        3 5ms  4ms  4 5ms    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Alarm Cycle If parameters are assigned to this mode of analog inputs  then   e A measurement cycle will be processed  Channel 1  2  3  4     e The measured value of each measured channel will be made available to  the application program for collection    e After expiry of the alarm time in the C7 CPU  a process alarm will be  triggered and a new measurement cycle initiated     A D conversion A D conversion  of the channels of the channels                   a  y  ao  N  Nn  O  Q  je   al  A     to C7    CPU     e                0 5ms       z gt   Measurement cycle       Assigned alarm time       Figure 4 4 Sequence of the Measurement of all 4 Channels with an Assigned  Measurement cycle     If individual measurement channels are deactivated  then the measurement  cycle will be correspondingly shorter     Parameter Table 4 3 shows which parameters  Characteristics of     e Are static or dynamic   Analog Inputs    e Can be set for all or individual analog inputs     Table 4 3 Parameter Characteristics of Analog Inputs    Static Dynamic Effective Range    Enable diagnostic alarm Static Anal
160. et up for one recipe  This permits a fruit juice  plant to operate with different types of drinks  for example  by using a differ   ent data record for each type of drink     Name  DETAR Nectar Juice  Orange  SON Ae SE Joal  Water  KON eh oll Oeil  Sugar  li REG  PERO Oe all  Aroma  MAOH GF 400 g KOORE  m  o o a o      ii     sie  Entries of the recipe Data record 1 Data record 2 Data record 3     Mixture       All data records are stored on the OP  Only the data record which is active at  the moment is stored on the PLC  This saves memory space in the PLC     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 26 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Identification of  recipes and data  records    Standard screens  for data records    Directory for  recipes    Standard O I Functions    A recipe is identified by a recipe number and a recipe title specified during  configuration     A data record is identified by a data record number and a data record name  assigned in the OP     The clear and unmistakable identification factor for a data record is the data  record number and not the data record name     This means that  although several data records with the same name may ex   ist  several data records with the same number cannot exist  If no name is  assigned to a data record  it is assigned the name       data record        Standard screens with the following functions are available for data records           Record    Edit Print Transfer       Transfer data records from the  OP to the PLC or vice versa  
161. eters  changing   6 21  Internal error         J  Job area  9 16     K    Key assignment  function keybord image  9 10   Key functions   Key labeling  function     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01        Keyboard   C7 623   C7 624   group bit   functions keyboard   9 10  system keyboard image   9 9  Keyboard emulation   C 14   Keys    arrow keys   6 4   DIR  7 19    display contrast adjustment   6 4  Recipe directory   6 3  second function     L  LAD     Language  C 4  setting   Languages   Last value   LED   8 3  acknowledge   assignment   condition               information text   6 4   shift   6 3  LED activated   LED assignment  bit number  9  11   LED image   9 11   Left justified input   Limit value check   Lines  on display   C 2  Load control program   Load memory   Local data   Logging   Logging in  LOGIN   6 26  Logging out  LOGOUT   LOGIN   LOGOUT   6 26     Lower threshold  period time   4 33             M    Measured value  analog input   4 12  Measured value resolution     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Index    Measurement    parameter block   type of   Measurement period  frequency calculation   4 33   Measurement ranges  4 11   Measuring cycle  alarm c cle   4 8   memory area pointers   Memory byte   Memory reset  2  10           Message bit  9 4  Message bit procedure   Message level  6   display number area  l 12    leaving    selecting  7 2    Message logging   6 22     activating   deactivating   6 22  On Off  
162. evel        Simultaneous pressing of more than one key may result in erroneous input     You can call up freely configurable functions up with the function keys  K1   K16  Every key has its own LED  seg Figure 6 1   which can be    controlled from the C7 CPU     The soft keys F1   F4  C7 623  or F1   F8  C7 624  underneath the display  can be configured with different functions depending on the display     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     J  T  ESC Function The key has various functions  depending on the settings of the  function level  This is explained in Table 6 2     Table 6 2 Function of the ESC Key    Cancel Pressing ESC cancels field inputs provided that they  have not been confirmed with ENTER     Branch backwards If the ESC key is pressed within a screen  you branch  back to the configured cross jump destination  by  default  the last position called  and finally  from the  start screen to the message level     You cannot branch back further than the message level     Hide system message At message level  the ESC key is used to hide a system  message   Cancel display of To cancel the display of information text  press ESC to   information text return to the previous display     Reset while scrolling through   To cancel scrolling through messages at the message  messages level  press ESC to reset the display to the current  message        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 5    Operating the C7
163. ferent categories     Information on the category to which a system message belongs is contained  in the message number     Message number    g    ULI Message text    Driver error  Startup message  Warning   Note   Operating error  Other message  Configuration error  Internal error    Message Category The message category gives you a rough idea of the cause of a system  message     A few important system messages are shown below together with their causes  and the action that has to be taken  Self explanatory system messages are not  included     Note    Messages are displayed in English until configuration data have been  downloaded to the C7     Procedure for Proceed as follows for all system messages that relate to    internal errors        Internal Errors 1  Switch off the C7 then restart it     2  Put the C7 in Download mode during start up  refer to  Section 2 1     download the configuration again and restart the C7     3  If the error continues to occur  please contact the nearest Siemens branch  office  Report the number of the error that has occurred and any variable  that may be included in the message     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 15    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Messages The following tables list the most important messages  their causes and  possible action to take     Ready for Waiting for data from PG PC  transfer    Data Data transfer Data Data being transferred between PG PC and C7 transf
164. for transferring data from the programming  device to the C7 and vice versa  A distinction is made between a transfer  S7  trans  via the MPI and via the printer port  trans      The user memory contains     gt  Code Blocks and     Data Blocks of the user  program  The user memory is integrated in the C7 CPU as flash memory  In  general  however  the user program is executed from the     Work Memory  of the C7 CPU     The user program contains all instructions  declarations and data for signal  processing that are used for controlling a plant or process  It is assigned to a  programmable module  e g  C7 CPU  FM  and can be split up into smaller  units  blocks      The work memory is a RAM in the     C7 where the processor accesses the  user program during program processing     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Index    A    Access rights   Acknowledge key   Acknowledgement    bit    groups  7 5   Acknowledgement procedure  9 6  Acknowledging  alarm messages   Activated LED   Actual value of counter  calculate   aaa  information   4 19   Address assignment   customer specific module     signal modules     Addresses  analog function  A 6  universal input   Addressing   Addressing of recipes and data records   Alarm   Alarm acknowledgement  number                overflow   paging through   print   suppressing  7 5  texts   unacknowledged   Alarm message buffer   deleted automatically   viewing  7 11          C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C62
165. g the       Processing time for the timers    the sum of all the times listed below is valid     0 4 ms  Process input image transfer time     0 3 ms  Process output image transfer time     1 74  Operating system run time     0 1 ms  Rack monitoring     1 5ms  User program execution time     4 04 ms     Processing time for the S7 timers    For four timers  the single update takes 4 x 7 us   0 03 ms   The execution time for the timers is calculated as follows     4 04 ms    ae  x 0 03 mS   0  04 ms    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    e 2nd subtotal  The response time not including the delay times of the  inputs and outputs is calculated from the total of     4 04 ms  Result of the first subtotal     0 03 ms  Processing time for S7 timers    4 07 5 ms     e Delay times for the inputs and outputs        The digital input of the C7 has an input delay of max  4 8 ms per  channel        The delay time of the digital output of the C7 can be neglected         The analog input of the C7 has a resolution of 12 bits  The conversion  time per channel is approximately 0 5 ms  All four channels are  supposed to be active  Calibration measurement must be enabled  The  cycle time is thus 2 5 ms         The analog output of the C7 has a conversion time of 0 8 ms per  channel  A settling time for the ohmic load of 0 1 ms must be added to  this  This yields a response time for the analog output of 0 9 ms     e Response times with delay times of 
166. h C7    Overview    C7 OP    Operator Interface  Functions    Screens    Operational states  current process values and faults can be visualized with  the C7  In addition  you can perform inputs to the C7 that will be written to  the C7 CPU  Machine diagnostics functions can also be configured in the C7     The C7 offers a series of standard functions  The screens and the operation of  the C7 can be optimally tailored to the individual requirements of the process  during the configuration     The C7 OP processes the O I functions configured for the C7  It is  independent of the C7 CPU and is still operable  for example  if the C7 CPU  enters the STOP state  The C7 OP is assigned a separate MPI address and  connected to the C7 CPU via the MPI interface  This interface forms the link  between the C7 OP and the computer used for configuring  programming  device PC      The basic functions of a C7 consist of the visualization of process states and  the operation of the process  The sequence of operator prompting 1s  controlled by a configuration to be planned and loaded by the user  The  following display and operator functions can be configured for C7     e Screens   e Event messages  e Fault messages   e Recipes   e Information texts  e Logging    e Multi language operator prompts    Logically related process data from the control system can be displayed  together in one screen and changed individually as appropriate  A screen  comprises several screen entries  since  for examp
167. h than the change of rotary speed in an  electrical drive     e The approximate value for the polling time is around 1 second     e Avoid cyclic transfer of the user data area  Polling time 0   Instead of this  use the control jobs to transfer the user data areas spontaneously     e Place the variables of a message or a screen without gaps in one data  area     e In order that changes in the C7 CPU are recognized by the C7 OP  they  must at least be impending during the actual polling time     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 9 23    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       A    SFCs and SFBs in the C7 CPU    Introduction The C7   CPU provides you with various system functions  for example  for  program handling and diagnostics  You invoke these system functions in your  user program with the number of the SFC or SFB     You will find detailed descriptions of all system functions in the Reference  Manual  235      Real Time Clock For the clock functions  the CPU offers you the following system functions   Function    SFC No  Name Description Execution  Time    SFC SET_CLK Setting the clock time  If the clock to be set is a master clock  the clock time synchro   nization is triggered simultaneously  If the clock to be set is a  slave clock  only the clock time is set     ie READ_CLK Reading the clock time   190 ps     190 ps      SET_RTM Setting the oper
168. has been set  the  with E gt  required password is requested  ENTER by the system     Enter the password and acknowledge The parameter list is displayed     with  amp   ENTER 2    Quit the special screen with   ESC    Leave the standard screen with Z You are changed to the previous  ESC level        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 21    Operating the C7  General     Changing Printer  Parameters    Activating    Deachivating the  Message Logging    6 22       The parameters  set as default parameters for the C7 OP interfaces during  configuration can be modified by means of the standard screen  You can set  the following     e Characters per line  parameter values  20  40 or 80   e Lines per page  parameter values  60 to 72   e Message logging  ON  OFF     To set the printer parameters  follow the procedure outlined below     From the basic screen choose System  and the screen level    system settings        Select the standard screen Printer           Characters line J    Lines   page 72          Message logging ON                Using the arrow keys  scroll through the  parameter list on the display to the  required parameter     Choose the value for the parameter by New parameter is set   using a symbolic value  to be configured  in advance     Confirm the changed parameter If a password has been set  the  required password is requested  by the system     Enter the password and acknowledge The parameter list is displayed     again    B    Quit the spe
169. he comparison value is reached and counting  is restarted  beginning with zero  Due to the immediate reset  the specified  comparison value never can be read out     In the following program example  the universal inputs are parameterized as  follows     UII counter C1  UP counter C2  UI3 counter C3  UI4 standard digital input  not used in the example    The three counters are parameterized as follows     alarm  yes  counting direction  forward  edge  rising    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 49    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Execution of block   1  First  all three counters are stopped at start   up     This is necessary so that the counter will start counting at zero after a  complete restart  If this is not required  that is if the counter must  continue after a restart with its    old    value  the counters must not be  stopped     2  After a waiting time of about 10 ms  a comparison value is written for  each counter     This waiting time is required so that the STOP command for the counters  can become effective on the C7 module  In the complete restart OB   OB100   the times are not critical since the cycles are not monitored     3  Immediately after the comparison value has been written  the comparison  values are declared valid and the counters are started     4  OBI  The counter values can be read cyclically in the OB1  The counter status  bits are evaluated to ensure that the counters are activ
170. he keys of the C7 can be driven by the C7 CPU   This way it is possible to signal to the user that a certain key  press makes sense in a given situation     For LED control  it is necessary to create an LED image on the  C7 CPU  In the configuration  two bits are assigned to every  LED in the LED image area  These two bits can be used to  implement four different states  off  steady light  low speed  flashing and high speed flashing    The structure of the LED image is described irf Section 9 4 3        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 8      Extended O I Functions    Table 8 2 Control Functions  continued     Evaluating the The C7 stores information about the object type called in its screen   screen number number area  Thus it is possible for information about the current  display contents of the C7 OP to be transferred to the application  program on the C7 CPU  and from there  for certain reactions to be  triggered   for example calling another screen     The structure of the screen number area is described in Section 9 5     Function keyboard   By pressing a function key on the C7  you can set a bit in the  image function keyboard image in the C7 CPU  This bit can be  evaluated via the application program     In order to achieve this  you must first create the necessary data  area on the C7 CPU for the keyboard image  and specify the  appropriate area pointer in the configuration for assigning the  key to a bit     A maximum of two pressed keys can be 
171. ht in the field  for password level   4  Enter a password level 1 8 for the  password and confirm it   ESC    To change a password  call the password entry in the same way as you do for  allocating a password and enter the new password by overwriting the old one     If you just want to change the password level and not the password  skip the  field containing the password entry by pressing ENTER  Then move the  cursor with the right arrow key to the field for the password level and enter  the new level     To delete a password  call the password entry in the same way as you do for  allocating and changing a password but overwrite the first character of the  password with a zero     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    6 29    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    In this Section       Messages  1  3  5    Transferring Data Records E  3 E  Deleting Data Records  3    STATUS VAR and MOD VAR with the C7 OP 3    3    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    7 1    Standard O I Functions    7 1 Messages    Overview Events and states in the control process are shown on the C7 display by way  of messages  A message consists of static text as a minimum  If required   variables are integrated into a message     The following types of message are displayed on the C7   e Event messages  e Alarm messages    e System messages    Selecting Message You get into the message level by pressing  Level ESC    Leavi
172. ich key she should press  depending on  the situation     In order to enable this possibility  you must configure the appropriate data  areas  so called images  in the C7 CPU  and declare them as    area pointers     during the configuration     The keyboard image is spontaneously transferred  That means the transfer  always happens if a change is registered at the C7 OP  In this case you do not  need to configure a polling time  A maximum of two simultaneous key  presses can be transferred at one time     e   All keys  except SHIFT key     As long as the corresponding key is pressed  the assigned bit in the  keyboard image has the value 1  otherwise it has the value 0     Bit value         Key pressed    e SHIFT key                When the SHIFT key 1s first pressed  the assigned bit in the keyboard  image receives the value 1  This state remains also after letting the key  go until the SHIFT key is pressed again     Bit value       t pressed                C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 4 1 System Keyboard Image    Layout The system keyboard image is a data area with a fixed length of two data  words     Every key of the system keyboard is assigned exactly one bit in the system  keyboard image  with the exception of the DIR key and the cursor keys     The system keyboard image must also be declared as    area pointer  type   system keyboard    in the configuration  This image can b
173. in recipe no  x  BIN format        660 Invalid destination configured for cross jump in screen   Add to configuration and repeat  download     662 Invalid destination configured for cross jump in screen   Add to configuration and repeat  download       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 27    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Incorrect configuration x  x  1  8  Change configuration of    Variable x  process link and transfer    Data type does not correspond to DB or l l  x   9  13  Change configuration of  area    DB length greater than 1024 pointer and transfer again    DW is in data block header x 14  Restrict configuration and  Actual value is not in send block transfer again    DB number greater than 15    Setpoint is not in receive block  Setpoint actual value is not in receive block    Initial value is not in send block    O o N Aaa BPW NY    Data type does not correspond to DB  DB number greater than 15   DB length greater than 1024   DW is not in data block header   Area located in wrong DB   Sum of data blocks too high    Too many variables were requested simultaneously   Remedy  Configure      a longer basic clock         fewer variables in the screen       681 The link between OP and controller is disturbed  The  interface parameters are possibly set incorrectly      682 Configure fewer process links for the screen currently  displayed        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C 28 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP 
174. in time  1 e   hourly  daily   weekly  annually  at which a certain function is to be executed  Up to 48  schedulers and their corresponding functions can be configured     A scheduler is contained in a screen entry where it can be entered  changed  or deactivated when the screen is displayed     When a scheduler time is reached  the configured bit is set in the interface  area of the PLC     Seg chapter 9   or detailed information on the interface area of the C7   CPU     The following functions can be called via schedulers    e Print alarm message buffer  chronologically or together   e Print event message buffer  chronologically or together   e Select screen   e Print screen    e Print data record    The schedulers have already been preset via configuration  A scheduler can  be changed or deactivated via input fields in a screen entry     The scheduler is activated as long as a time is displayed in the input field   The LED of the DELETE key goes on when a scheduler is activated  Acti   vated means that the configured function will be executed when the sched   uler time is reached  If the input field contains      the scheduler is deacti   vated     Proceed as follows to set a scheduler time   1  Select input field     You can use the cursor keys to switch between scheduler type and day of  the week field  and date field and time field     2  Enter scheduler time       Date and time are entered via the system keyboard     Activate the SHIFT   LOCK combination to control th
175. ins  after Clearing the  C7 CPU        Commissioning  Start Up     Select the STOP by pressing the corresponding function keys  The STOP  lights up       Select the MRES function  memory reset  and wait  approx  3 seconds     until the STOP LED lights up again     Immediately after the STOP LED lights up again  select STOP with the  corresponding function keys and then MRES a second time     Result         Ifthe STOP LED flashes for approx  3 seconds and then lights up  again  everything is O K   C7 has been completely cleared         Ifthe STOP LED does not flash  or other indicators light up or flash   exception  BATF LED   repeat steps 4 and 5  perhaps evaluate the  diagnostic backup of the C7 using the programming device         Ifthe BATF and the SF LEDs on the C7 light up  the buffer battery is  absent  If a buffer battery is indeed fitted  then you must search the  diagnostic backup of the C7 CPU for additional error entries       In order to be able to continue working  you must set the C7 CPU to    STOP or RUN   RUNP     The STOP LED flashes during the memory reset of the C7 CPU and the  following process is performed     L     The C7 CPU erases the entire application program in the work memory  and in the load memory     The C7 CPU erases the backup memory   The C7 CPU tests the hardware     If an application is stored in the integrated flash memory of the C7 CPU     ontents will be automatically copied into the load memory  see  Load Erase      If no application is
176. ipolar range lower limit  TLL  JU comp   bipo NOP 0  L W 16 9400     bipolar range lower limit  ITD   T LL        Calculating the range  hexadecimal      rech  NOP 0   L W 16 6CO00     upper limit for unipolar and bipolar     range identical  ITD   LL  _D   T RANGE_HEX     buffer difference        Relating setpoint to total measuring range     L upper limit     compute range  L lower limit   R     T RANGE_DEC     C7   623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 43    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    L setpoint     relate setpoint to total     range   L lower limit     R    L RANGE_DEC     R    T PERCENT         Computing hex pattern to be output      L RANGE_HEX     relate hex value to total range   DTR    L PERCENT     R    LLE     add offset   DTR     R    RND     convert floating point number to     32 bit integer   T channel     output result    Calling the FC127 An example for calling the FC127 is given in the following   in OB1    Before calling the function block  the range limits and the setpoint must be  reassigned to memory double words  This is necessary to enable using  variable values  Normally     upper limit    and    lower limit    are fixed values   the setpoint    is variable     This can be achieved by setting the upper limit    and    lower limit     parameters in the declaration section of the FC127 to  gt REAL        To enhance  flexibility in a test environment  this variant has been omitted     C7 623  C
177. is also  contained in the    SZL ID     Figure B 2 shows the structure of the    SZL ID     for the CPUs     Bit 151418121110 98 76543210    lolofofol   TTT ITT itt    Se aa       Identification  number   sublist ID     ID forthe  sublist  excerpt       Figure B 2 Structure of the    SZL ID    of the Sublist    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 B 3    System Status List in the C7 CPU    ID for the Sublist You use the ID for the sublist excerpt to select the extent of the sublist to be  Excerpt output   e On  The complete sublist is output    e lytoEg  A special sublist is output    e Fy only header information is output    Index You must assign an index if you want to read out only one specific record  from the sublist     Length of the This data word shows how much information  in bytes  a record of the sublist  Subsequent contains    Records   Number of This data word shows how many records the transferred sublist contains   Records   Table of Sublists Table B 1 below shows the individual sublists of the system status list with    the entries relevant for the individual C7 CPUs     Table B 1 Sublists of the System Status list of the C7 CPU    SZL_ID Sublist Index Record Contents     ID of the  Sublist Excerpt   Individual  Records of the  Sublist   C7 CPU identification CPU type and version number  OOlly All records of the sublist  Ollly One record of the sublist    C7 CPU features  0012H All records of the sublist  01124 Only those records of a group of 
178. itioned on the first field  No input or updating can be commenced     Delete the current line  If the cursor is positioned in a value field  not  BIN   and there is at least one character  the character at the cursor  position is deleted        After editing the address list  the values in the C7 CPU must be updated   This does not happen directly after confirmation of an individual value  First  when you press the ENTER key after confirmation of the last entry  will the  new values be transferred to the C7 CPU  During the update  a flashing  asterisc appears in the top right hand corner of the display  If the asterisc  does not flash  then no logical connection to the C7 CPU has been  established     During the update  no inputs can be entered  The updating process can be    broken with  ESC    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01       Extended O I Functions    In this Section In this section you will discover what possibilities you have to adjust the    C7 OP so that the C7 CPU process can trigger situation dependent reactions  of the C7 OP     Overview of Section     Process dependent Operator Guidance BA    Self defined Screen Hierarchy a     Controlling the C7 OP from the C7 CPU       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 8 1    Extended O I Functions    8 1 Process Dependent Operator Guidance    Overview    Branching by  Means of Softkeys  and Function Keys    8 2    Different action is normally required or allowed in different operating 
179. k    Trg Drazena Petrovica 3        Cibona        33 88 95    32 66 95    a  00385  41   Fax 0 03 85  41    Luxemburg    1017 Luxemburg Hamm  Siemens S A   AUT  Hr  Nockels  20  Rue des Peupliers   B P 1701   B   003 52  4 38 43 4 21   Fax 0 03 52  4 38 43 4 15    Niederlande  2595 AL Den Haa    Postfach 83  T 0043 g 25 01 37 88  Fax 00 43  1  25 01 39 40    Polen    40 931 Katowice   Siemens Sp  z 0 0   Niederlassung  Katowice  Hr  Krzak   UI  Kosciuszki 30   T 0048  3  157 32 66   Fax 00 48  3  157 30 75    60 815 Poznan l  Siemens Sp  z 0 0   Niederlassung  Poznan  Hr  Weiss  Ul  Gajowa 6  47 08 86    T 00 48 a  Fax 00 48  61  47 08 89    03 821 Warszawa l  Siemens Sp  z 0 0   Hr  Cieslak  UI  Zupnicza 11    T 0048 3 6 70 91 47   Fax 00 48  2  6 70 91 49    53 332 Wroclaw  Siemens Sp  z 0 0   Niederlassung  Wroclaw  Hr  Wojniak    Siemens Nederland N V   IPS APS  UI  Powstanc  w Slaskich 95    Hr  Penris  Prinses Beatrixlaan 26    0048    3 33 32 74       0031  70  l 333 3406    Fax 00 31  70    Norwegen    5033 Fyllingsdalen  Siemens A S Bergen   Hr  Troan  Bratsbergveien 5  Postboks 36 60   17 67 41    T 0047 iP   Fax 00 47  55  16 44 70    0518 Oslo 5   Siemens A S  AUT Produkter   Hr  Eggen  Ostre Aker vei 90  Postboks 10  Veitvet   T 0047 53 63 34 09   Fax 00 47  22  63 33 90    7004 Trondheim    Siemens A S Trondheim   Hr  Thorsen  Spelaugen 22  T 0047 3  95 96 69  Fax 00 47  73  95 95 04    A 60 59 97  Fax 00 48  71  60 55 88  Portugal   2700 Amadora    Siemens S A 
180. ks  Maximum of 4096 retentive data bytes  Maximum total of all 4544 bytes  retentive data areas  Clock memory Memory that can be used in the user program to obtain a clock beat   Number  8  1 memory byte   freely selectable address of a memory byte  Local data Total 1536 bytes  256 bytes for each priority class    Process image area From 0 to 127  Digital inputs   from E 0 0 to E 127 7    Digital outputs   from A 0 0 to A 127 7    Nesting depth 8 for each priority class  4 additional within an error OB    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01       Control with the C7 CPU    Table 3 1 Performance Characteristics of the C7 CPU    Performance C7 CPU  Characteristic  Blocks  OBs    FBs  FCs    DBs   SDBs 9  SFCs 37  SFBs         C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 5    Control with the C7 CPU    3 4 C7 CPU Blocks    Overview Table 3 2 lists all blocks that the C7 CPU can process     Table 3 2 Overview  C7 CPU Blocks   a ee ee  at the end of this table    ee fem  mee     ee   O S e    a   ee BE eye  SFC 34 A complete list of all SFCs in the C7 CPU can  be found in Appendix A   A detailed description can be found in the  STEP 7 documentation     Organization Block The operating system of the C7 CPU is based on event controlled user   OB  program processing  The following table shows which organization blocks   OBs  are automatically called up by the operating system for which event        Description of the A detailed description of the vari
181. l  places and too many have been entered  they are ignored  if too few have  been entered  the field is padded with zeroes     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     Alphanumeric Alphanumeric inputs contain a mix of digits and letters     Values     Ce  For the numerical part of the input  please proceed as described in       Numerical values        Entering If you wish to enter a letter at the current cursor position  you must enable  Alphanumeric the corresponding alphanumeric character set   Values    Entering Characters A   F    Characters A to F can be entered directly with the numeric keys 1 to 6 in  combination with the shift key  To enter an alphanumeric string for instance  7FEB53  follow the procedure outlined below     E Enter the number 7 as normal  via the Digit appears in the input field   gt  fee keyboard    Press Pe Sr B key  The activated shift key is indi    cated by the illuminated LED    Enter the letters F  on the 6 key   E  on   The letters appear in the input    the 5 key  and B  on the 2 key   field     Press Pe ir q key again The Shift key is deactivated  The  LED goes out     Enter the rest of the digits  5 and 3  using   Your input is accepted and the  the keyboard and confirm your entry displayed entry is reset     with  gt     ENTER       Entering the Complete Character Set of the C7    If the characters available on the keypad are not sufficient for the  alphanumeric input  you can select additional 
182. le  the description of a  machine state normally requires more related data than can be represented in  one display section  In this manner  data on operating temperature  liquid  level  rotational speed and run time can illustrate the current machine state     The C7 623 and C7 624 have line oriented displays  A screen is thus compiled  from text elements  that can be combined with static text and current status  values     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    1 3    Introduction    Event Messages    Recipes    Fault Messages    Information Texts    Logging    1 4    Event messages are information and operating tips regarding the current  machine or process states during normal production operations  Event  messages can contain process values  The representation of the process  values can be either numeric  for example motor running at 3000 revolutions  per second  or symbolic     When a product is made up of various ingredients in certain ratios  this  information is stored in a so called recipe     Take orange juice for example  Its production and bottling requires that  orange concentrate and water be mixed in a certain ratio  These values are  stored as variables in a recipe     Each recipe can be made up of several data records containing different val   ues for the recipe     The data can be edited in the C7   OP  transferred to the C7   CPU and read out  from the C7   CPU     In the C7   OP  the recipes are combined by recipe number and title in a
183. letters and special characters  from the extended character set  The extended character set is available for  all fields with the format STRING  To enter the string 18 OCT 61  for  example  please proceed as follows     You must first configure the input  field with the variables  As an  example  you can select a string  with the format CHR  Variable  IB  Enter the digits 1 and 8 as normal                             using the numeric keys on the  system keyboard     Press the  O key The extended character set is  SHIFT l l l  available in the current input    field        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 17    Operating the C7  General     Symbolic Values    6 18                Scroll with the A or V keys throug    the valid extended character set  Variable 190                      4  Select O  and using the arrow key  move   The selected character is accepted  one position to the right  by moving the cursor key   5  Select C  and using the arrow key  move   ditto  one position to the right     Select T  and using the arrow key  move    nn  one position to the right     Press He Sur B key a Shift key is deactivated  The  LED goes out     Enter the remaining digits 6 and   as before  using keys 6 and 1 with de activated Shift          Variable  180cT6 fl                      Then confirm with The input is accepted and  ali the input display is reset     If a field has to be filled by entering symbolic values  take the value from a  list of options     
184. lity Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages      401 Entred value does not match display format Be    Operating error in STATUS VAR or MODIFY VAR  screen   after pressing INS when 10th variable line  already assigned      fn  imesincis  O  w o o o o      409 Lower limit for input ignored Enter a value greater than or equal to  Var     410 Upper limit for input ignored Enter a value smaller than or equal to  Var     411 Selection of special screens is not permissible in this case   If necessary  modify the configured interface parameters       442 Thie message indicates a data block error  The x and y   Either correct the block size or the  variables identify the cause of the error  X variable  and   block number or send the correct data  the number of the affected receive block  y variable   block   x variable   O Invalid block size entered in receive block no  y   1 Invalid block number entered in receive block no  y        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 22 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Download to C7 CPU not possible at pressend      C7 CPU overloaded      Standard FB not called for more than 1 5 s        Check user program      506 Too many message blocks having the same block Error occurs when C7 CPU sends too  number in transit  overloading  many jobs within a certain time with     Fetch message bit area       509 Firmware version different from standard FB version Load new standard FB onto C7 CPU  
185. lock Memory       Table 3 6 Parameter Block    Clock Memory       Parameter Explanation Value Range Default Setting  C7 CPU    Clock memory For    clock memory   yes     a memory Yes No No  byte must be defined   Memory byte Memory byte that should be used for the   From 0 to 255     clock memory byte          C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  3 10 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 2 Parameter Block    Start Up Characteristics       Parameter Block The Table 3 7 lists the parameters of the parameter block    Start up     Start Up characteristics     Characteristics       Table 3 7 Parameter Block    Start up Characteristics     Explanation Value Range Default Setting    Self test after POWER ON   For    Self test at cold restart   yes     the C7 CPU Yes no Yes  and erase tests its internal RAM after every POWER ON  Start up Only Restart can be set for the C7 CPU  Restart Restart    e Manual    Restart    e Automatic    Module time limit  Maximum time for the    distribution    of the pa    from 1 to 10 000  rameters to the modules within the module  mounting sub rack    e Parameter assignment  during start up  in ms     Module time limit Maximum time for the ready message of all mod    from 1 to 65 000     Ready message after ules after POWER ON  POWER ON  in ms  If the modules do not transmit a ready message  to the C7 CPU within this time  then the  C7 CPU reverts to STOP        Note  You should assign the highest values to the parameters for the    Mod
186. m  inform the C7   OP through the data mailbox which    data record it should transfer  To do this  enter the identifications of the  recipe in the data mailbox            Set bit 4 to 1    request data through data mailbox  in the S7 program       5  The C7 OP reads the data mailbox  C7   O   P reads the data mailbox     B e E C7 OP resets bit 4 and transfers the data record or the variable as de   scribed for case 1 from step 2 onwards        C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  9 22 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 8 Notes on Optimization    Decisive Factors The construction of the user data area described ih section 9 3 and the  configured polling times in the area pointers are significant factors for the  actual reachable update times  The update time is the polling time plus the  transfer time plus the processing time     To reach an optimal update time  the following points should be observed  during the configuration     e Configure the individual data areas as large as necessary  but as small as  possible     e Define the data areas which belong together contiguously  The actual  update time improves if you configure one large area as opposed to  several small areas     e The total performance is unnecessarily compromised if the polling times  are too small  Set the polling time according to the changing speed of the  process values  The change in temperature of an oven for example  is  significantly more sluggis
187. m from normal message text   Unacknowledged alarm messages flash permanently     Messages may contain static text and variable fields  The variable fields  display  that is  current actual values of the C7 CPU in numerical or symbolic  form  In addition  the date and time can also be output in messages     Output event and alarm messages are stored in dedicated message buffers   The messages available in the buffers can be displayed on the screen and    logged with a printer   Message Bit If there is a condition present in the current process for a message to be  Procedure for issued  that is a setpoint has been reached  the application program sets a bit  Event and Alarm in the data area for event and alarm messages  The C7 reads the data area  Messages after a set polling time  In this way  a message is detected as having       arrived     The C7 resets the bit when the condition for issuing the message  no longer exists  The message is then regarded as having    departed        Further information about the data area can be found in section 9 3     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 3    Standard O I Functions    Alarm and Event  Message buffers    Size of Residual  Buffer    Standby Message    7 4    Alarm and event messages are written to the C7   s alarm and event message  buffers respectively upon arrival  The following events are entered into the  buffer in chronological order     e Time of the event   e Arrival and departure of the event   e Ackno
188. matic   Cancel field inputs   6 5     Changing  operating level   Channel Specific  diagnostics byte   Character  delete    Character height  on display   Character Set  extended   Characters  per line   Characters A F  entering   6 17  Chronologically message print                Clock  C7 CPU    correction faktor     Index 2    Clock memory    parameter block   3 10  Clocks   frequencies    period times   Communication  cycle loading   3 18  Communications  error   Components of screen entry  7 21  Compulsory print   Configurable languages   C 3   Configuration    not loaded  2 3   reload   Configuration error   Configuration loaded  start up   2 3  Configuring error  K  Contrast  C 2  Contrast adjustment    direct  6 25   standard screen   6 25   Control and checkback bits   9 14   Control jobs    SIMATIC S7   Control jobs and their parameters   Conversion  analog output   Conversion time  analog input   Correction faktor   Count direction  setting   Count input  parameter   Count inputs  parameter block   Counter    software    special input    start    stop    threshold frequency   Coupling identifier   CPU values  update   Current measurement range   analog I O    analog output   Customer specific module   4 3   Cycle behavior    parameter block   3 18  Cycle loading    due to self test   to communication              C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01            Cycle time   analog input   extension    Cycletime  maximum  3 18        D  Data area     
189. meters can result in incorrect behaviour of  the I O  Table 4 23 lists the layout of the parameter data sets     Table 4 23 Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block    What Can Be Assigned Meaning of the Respective Bits  Value    Enable diagnostics AI1  Enable diagnostics AI2  Enable diagnostics AI3  Enable diagnostics AI4  Enable diagnostics AQ1    Enable diagn  wirebreak AI1   1 Yes  only if measurement range  Enable diagn  wirebreak AI2   1 Yes  only if measurement range  Enable diagn  wirebreak AI3   1 Yes  only if measurement range    Enable diagn  wirebreak AI4   1 Yes  only if measurement range    Enable diagnostics alarm for mod    O No 1 Yes    Use 0 Disable  normal DI   1 Alarm DI  2 CI    Process alarm O No  1 Yes  always with alarm DI    selectable if use   2     Edge O Rising edge  1 Falling edge     only if not deactivated   Direction O0 Forwards  1 Backwards  only if CI     Use 0 Disable  normal DI   1 Alarm DI  2 CI    Process alarm O No  1 Yes  always with alarm DI    selectable if use   2        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 39    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 23    What Can Be Assigned Meaning of the Respective Bits  Value    Table with Data Set Descriptions Parameter Block  Continued     Edge    Direction    Use    Process alarm    edge    O Rising  edge  1 Falling  edge   only if not deactivated     O Forwards  1 Backwards  only if CI     0 Disable  normal DI   1 Alarm DI  
190. mployed C7 modules     C7 I O and the customer specific C7 modules always occupy the rack  Number 0     C7 Slots The logical slots 2 and 3 are reserved for the C7 CPU and the integrated  IM360     The I O incorporated in the C7 occupies the logical slots 4  digital I O  and 5   analog I O and universal inputs      Slots for Customer  The logical slots 6 to 11 can be occupied by a customer specific module   Specific Module    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 3    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    C7 Layout Figure 4 1 shows an example of a C7 with a customer specific module and  the connection of an additional S7 300                                      Slot number IM 361 3 4 5 6 7  Connecting cable 368                   Modules                                                    Slot number IM 361 3 4 5 6 7  Connecting cable 368                      Modules                               Slot number IM 361 3 4 5 6 7  Connecting cable 368                                                                                        Customer specific module                      AE                                                                               Slot number 2 3 45    Digital address 0   3  assigned  0 1   Analog address 272   287       Figure 4 1 Example of Slots in C7    Additional S7 300 You can connect max  three S7 300 racks to a C7  How these are connected  Racks is described in the S7 300 Installation and Hard
191. n  On the C7 624  four messages are shown for    an  8 x 40 display     If several messages are present simultaneously  the messages  are    displayed in succession and output according the following  priorities     1  System message   the most recent  if there are more than  one     Unacknowledged alarm message    Event message yet to depart    Acknowledged alarm message yet to depart       Standby message    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 1    Standard O I Functions    Table 7 1   FortsetzungExplanation of Display Sequences    Display Sequence Explanation    Mixed If there is no system message  the alarm and event messages  having the highest priority are displayed simultaneously one on  top of the other  For messages which extend beyond the limit of  the display line  the full length message text is repeated  automatically across the display     Exception  On the C7 624  two alarm messages  and two event messages are shown for  an 8 x 40 display     If several messages are present simultaneously for the combined   output  the messages are output according to the following   priorities    1  System message   the most recent  if there is more than  Unacknowledged alarm message   the second line simul     taneously displays the most recent  highest priority event  message yet to depart    3  Acknowledged alarm message yet to depart   the second  line  simultaneously displays the most recent  highest priority  event message    4  Standby message       C
192. n the standard screen   Select the desired recipe from the recipe directory     Using the cursor keys  select the data record to be deleted from the data  record directory     Press SHIFT   DELETE   Delete  Press ENTER    Do not delete  Press ESCAPE   Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary     If only one single data record exists  this record cannot be deleted       Exit the standard screen with ESCAPE     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 5 STATUS VAR and MOD VAR with the C7 OP    Overview The C7 offers the possibility to display and to modify address values  This is  possible by means of the configuration of special screens  similar to the PU  functions STATUS VAR and FORCE VAR  Thus  during on line operation  the control addresses of the C7 CPU can be processed directly at the C7 OP     STATUS VAR The addresses can be displayed using STATUS VAR     FORCE VAR With FORCE VAR  the addresses can be displayed and their values modified  and transferred back to the C7 CPU  The chosen addresses remain in the  static RAM and are valid after restarting the C7     Calling up You call the function FORCE VAR via the standard screen ForceVAR  After  FORCE VAR calling  the address list is displayed  Depending on the display line length a  one or two line address is presented     Figure 10 1 shows an example display for the SIMATIC S7     AS address   DB 10 ADR DEC 1234  DB ADR HEX   DB ADR HEX    Sa a CO                   Update in progress  
193. nal procedures     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 28 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 4 1 Setting Up and Editing Data Records    The OP automatically sets up a data record with the number 1 and the name     data record    for each recipe  All values of the data records are preset  with 0     You can edit this data record  To set up more data records  either copy this  data record  see  chapter 7 4 2   or edit the first data record and save it under a  different name     Editing data Proceed as follows to change existing recipe  data record values   reeores 1  Select standard screen Records     Edit  2  Select the desired recipe in the recipe directory     3  Select the data record to be edited in the data record directory     Note    You can have the recipe title displayed by paging up in the first entry     4  Position cursor on the value to be changed   5  Enter numeric or symbolic value     6  Confirm the value  If you want to change more values  position the cur   sor in the input field of the next entry and change the value there     7  To conclude editing data records after the last modified value has been  accepted  press ESCAPE  You will then be asked whether you want to  save the data record     8  Save  Position cursor on the Yes field and confirm with ENTER   Do not save  Press ESCAPE     Since the data record number already exists  you will then be asked  whether you want to overwrite the data record     9  Overwrite  Press ENTER   Do not ove
194. ncl  correction  calculation   Measurement   gt  overflow range     The error is identified after  the comparison of the mea   sured value  incl  correction  calculation   Measurement   gt   neg  overflow range  That  is  lt OmA for 4   20mA     The error is identified after  checking the parameter after  reading and processing the  parameter area     Diagnostics Messages and Reaction Possibilities  Continued     Reaction of the BG    An error counter will be  incremented  If the error  counter reaches a fixed value  of 3  then the error       wire   break    is reported     The bit is set and reset again  when the measurement  decreases     The bit is set and reset again  when the measurement  becomes valid     The measurement 7FFFy is  set in the incorrectly config   ured measurement channel  and the corresponding diag   nostics bit set or  for an out   put channel  0 V  0 mA is  output and the corresponding  bit set new line  If the module  had not been assigned a  parameter and the parameter  is corrected  Please check     then the bit incorrect param   eter    is reset and  if diagnos   tics alarm   yes  a diagnos   tics alarm reported to the  C7 CPU     Possible Elimination    Check the connection of the  appropriate measurement  channel     Check the connection of the  appropriate input channel or  transducer     Check the connection of the  appropriate input channel or  transducer     Assign correct parameters        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624
195. nd S7 Reference                    E Siemens Worldwide               0020000000es  GIOSSAIY tastcrcnsesacstsaceueaneueseetaaceses  INGO oie obese ee eee ee ees    vi    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Introduction    In this Chapter This chapter will inform you about the prerequisites for programming the C7  and its functionality as an operator interface device    Note    The C7 consists of two independent units  each with its own processor      C7 CPU and     C7 OP   Where necessary  these components are explicitly named in  Section 2 of the  manual     What Do you You require the following equipment and tools   Require to Operate  the C7      e A programming device or PC with MPI interface  and a programming  device cable  e STEP 7 appplications from version 2  including documentation    e The ProTool or ProTool Lite configuring tool from version 2   incl  documentation    e C7 connector set for I O and power supply    Operator Control and Monitoring with C7       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 1    Introduction    1 1 Control with the C7    Overview    C7 CPU    Program memory    Processor    Programming  Languages    Program with What    With Which  Devices    1 2    The user program that controls the process  that is to be visualized by the  operator interface part of the C7  runs in the C7 CPU     The operation of the C7 CPU is determined by the following functional  elements     It contains the user program     The pr
196. ndard O I Functions    Paging through  Messages in the  Message Level    Viewing Event and  Alarm Messages    7 10    If there are neither system messages nor unacknowledged alarm messages   you can page through the messages that have not yet departed  at message  level     To page through the messages  use the following cursor keys     Table 7 3 Keys for Paging through Messages    Next alarm message  Previous alarm message    Next event message  Previous event message       The current message will be displayed again if you press ESC or there is no  operator input for one minute     All configured event and alarm message text can be shown on the display   irrespective of the current event message buffer or alarm message buffer  contents  To do this  please proceed as follows     Select the standard screen Alarms     Text  to display alarm messages  or  Events     Text  to display event messages      By using the cursor keys  you can now scroll through the list of configured  message texts  either upwards or downwards     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 1 5 Viewing Message Buffers    Overview Messages displayed on the C7 are written to the corresponding message  buffer  The message buffers can be called in order to view message history by  means of standard screens     The times of occurrence  acknowledgment and departure are displayed in  chronological order for all messages     Viewing the alarm Choose the standard screen 
197. ng the C7 CPU    Overview The user program that controls the process to be visualized on the C7 OP  runs on the C7 CPU     Required Tools You require the following tools to develop the user program   e Programming device PC plus cable  e STEP 7 with the appropriate manuals  e C7    Programming Two programming languages are currently relevant to the C7 CPU     Languages  guag e STL  The statement list consists of several statements  Each statement in    your program contains operations  which represent a function of the  C7 CPU as a mnemonic     e LAD  A ladder diagram is a graphical programming language which  resembles an electrical circuit diagram     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 3    Control with the C7 CPU    3 3 Performance Characteristics of the C7 CPU    Introduction Table 3 1 lists the most significant performance characteristics of the  C7 CPU     Table 3 1 Performance Characteristics of the C7 CPU  Performance C7 CPU  Characteristic  Load memory e Integrated RAM 40 Kbytes  e Integrated flash memory 40 Kbytes    Approx  0 3 ms per 1000 statements    Digital inputs outputs 16 16    Bit memories   From M 0 0 to 255 7   Selectable retentivity    Preset  16 retentive memory bytes  from 0 to 15   Counters   From C 0 to C 63   Selectable retentivity    Preset  8 retentive counters  from 0 to 7   Times   From T 0 to T 127   Selectable retentivity    Preset  no retentive times    Retentive data area 0 Max  eight data areas from one or more data bloc
198. ng the You leave the message level by pressing oo  Message Level Saai    Event and Alarm Event and alarm messages are initiated by the C7 CPU  They are configured  Messages and they contain process related information  Alarm messages have to be  acknowledged     System Messages System messages are initiated by the C7 OP  They are not configured  They  provide information on operating states of the C7 OP or faults and  breakdowns in communication     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  1 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 1 1 Event and Alarm Messages    Overview The process states indicated by event or alarm messages are defined during  configuration     e Messages concerning malfunctions related to processes or states   that is     motor temperature too high    or    valve will not open    should be  categorized as alarm messages     e Messages that provide information concerning regular processes or states  such as    temperature reached    or    motor running    should be categorized  as event messages     In addition to status messages  information relating to an operation can also  be configured as event or alarm messages  If that is  a machine operator  wants to start the bottling process but has forgotten to open the water intake  valve on the mixer  a message such as    open water intake valve    Is  displayed as a prompt to rectify the oversight     Event and alarm messages can be configured so that any of their text  components flash to distinguish the
199. ns data describing the current status of an  C7 CPU  You can use it to gain an overview at any time of the following     e The current parameterization of the CPU and the parameterizable signal  modules    e The current statuses and sequences in the CPU and the parameterizable  signal modules     See the STEP 7 Standard and System Functions Reference Manual for a  detailed description of the structure of the system status list and all possible  entries     You can use SFC 51    RDSYSST    from the user program to read out the  entries in the system status list  see the Reference Manual  235       The system status list is divided into sublists  This makes it possible to target  specific information in the system status list     Each sublist contains   e Header information of 4 data words    e A specific number of records containing the event information    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    System Status List in the C7 CPU    Header The header information of a sublist is 4 data words long  Figure B 1 shows  Information the contents of the header information of a sublist     SZL ID  Sublist ID     Index  Specification of an object type object number    Length of a record contained in the sublist    Number of records in the sublist       Figure B 1 Header Information of a Sublist of the system status list    SZL ID Each sublist has an    SZL ID     In addition  it is possible to read only one  excerpt from a sublist  The ID of this excerpt from the sublist 
200. nt you can set up and edit data records  You can also transfer  data records from the C7   OP to the C7   CPU and back     e System settings  System     At this point you can modify settings in on line mode  This includes for  example  printer parameters  interface parameters  operating mode and  language changing     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Operating the C7  General     e Status variable  StatVar     At this point  the PG function STATUS VAR is called  you can use it to  display C7 CPU addresses     e Modify variable    At this point  the PG function MODIFY VAR is called  you can use it to  display and modify C7 CPU addresses     e Edit password  password     At this point  the super user assigns passwords for the different password  levels  Furthermore  login and logout procedures are included here     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 6 9    Operating the C7  General     Standard Screen  Hierarchy    6 10    Figure 6 4 shows an overview of the screen hierarchy of standard screens   You will find detailed information on functions and handling standard  screens in the relevant chapters of this manual           Basic Screen             Figure 6 4             Event Messages     Event mess      View          Print          Number       Delete       Overflow       Text                Alarm Messages     Alarm mess      View          Print          Number       Delete       Overflow       Text             Screens     Screens     E
201. nts in the case of a complete restart or power off     Field provided for assigning values to a parameter  values can be selected  from a list of permissible values          System Function Block        System Function    Signal modules  C7 I O  are the interface between the process and the C7   Signal modules comprise digital input and output modules and analog input  and output modules     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Softkeys    START UP    Startup Test    STEP 7    STEP 7 Tool    Substitute Value    System Diagnosis    System Function    System Function  Block    System Memory    System Message    Glossary    Keys with variable assignments  depending on the current display entry      The START UP mode is active during the transition from the STOP to the  RUN state     Verification of the CPU status and the memory status each time the C7 is  powered up     Programming language for generating user programs for SIMATIC S7  programmable controllers     A STEP 7 tool is an application of     gt  STEP 7  which is tailored to a specific  task     Substitute values are values which are output to the process in the case of  faulty signal output modules or which are used in the user program instead of  a process variable in the case of faulty signal input modules  The substitute  values can be specified in advance by the user  for example  maintain old  value      System diagnosis comprises the recognition  evaluation and signalling of  errors which occ
202. ocess alarm after reaching the comparison value   when connting up  or a zero transition  when  counting down     If frequency counter selected  then select the gate  time for the frequency counting    No further parameters for period time counter ee ee       Digital Inputs If the universal inputs are deactivated in the parameter block  default  setting   then the inputs react as digital inputs  However  no automatically  updated process image will be made available to the application program for  these inputs  The current saa of the input can only be read by means of a  direct peripheral access   See Table 4 14 of 4 15 for address      C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 25    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 3 Alarm Inputs    Introduction If universal inputs are used as alarm inputs  then a process alarm will be  generated every time the corresponding  assigned  edge at one of the inputs     Assignable Events The parameter assignment can be performed with STEP 7 Function  Hardware configuration     Process Alarm OB If a process alarm is sent from the I O to the C7 CPU  then the process alarm  OB  OB 40  will be called by the C7 CPU  The event that called the OB 40  is stored in the start information  declaration section  of the OB 40  You must  evaluate the additional information C1 to C3 in the start information     Declaration The entries in the declaration section of OB 40 can be found in Table 4 19   Section 
203. ocessor executes the program cyclically     e At the beginning of the cycle  the processor reads the signal states of all  inputs and generates the process image input table  PII     e The program is processed step by step  taking into account all counter  and timer values and bit memories    e The processor stores the signal states resulting from program execution in  the process image output table  PIQ   The states are then transferred to  the outputs     The C7 CPU is independent of the C7 CPU  It has a separate MPI address via  which it is connected to the C7 OP     At present  the C7 CPU generally supports two programming languages     e STL  The statement list consists of a series of statements  Each statement  in your program contains instructions which mnemonically represent a  function of the C7 CPU     e LAD  A ladder diagram is a graphical programming language that  resembles electrical circuit diagrams     The tool with which you prepare user programs is STEP 7  You can find the  operation notes necessary for programming in the User Manual  231   You  can use the manuals listed in the foreword for the individual languages     The STEP 7 runs on a programming device or PC  You can operate these  devices independently from the C7  You must connect the programming  device PC to the C7 via the MPI only when you wish to load your user  program into the C7     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Introduction    1 2 Operator Control and Monitoring wit
204. of OB 40 The bytes that are relevant to the user are hatched in the table     Table 4 19 Declaration section of OB 40    o  oes e  rename  Ce  om     Ao inomason p  Time stamp of event       Additional The start address of the C7 peripheral module is contained in the additional  Information 21 information Z1  byte 6 7    Address  272 or 01104    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 26 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Additional The serial number of the universal inputs that triggered the process alarm can  Information Z2 be found in byte 8 of the additional information Z2  Byte 9 is irrelevant     You can find the additional information broken down into bits in Figure 4 7    Byte 8  765483210  ololololi iiS  111 11           1  when universal input 1  has triggered process alarm    1  when universal input 2  has triggered process alarm    1  when universal input 3  has triggered process alarm          1  when universal input 4  has triggered process alarm       Figure 4 7 Addidtional Information Z2    Additional Additional information Z3 is not used and is set to 01104   Information Z3    Evaluation in The evaluation of process alarm in the application program is described in  Application the Manual  120    Program    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 2     Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 4 Counters    Counter    Actual Value of  Counter    Forward Co
205. of their urgency  This can  be done automatically by the C7 CPU or by the operator by means of the  acknowledge key  The C7 displays unacknowledged messages in flashing  mode  The ACK LED assigned to the acknowledge key also lights up     e If several alarm messages are waiting to be displayed  after one has been  acknowledged  the next one is shown on the display  which similarly has  to be acknowledged     e Ifno more alarm messages are waiting to be displayed  the C7 reverts to  the operating level from which it originally branched out of     During configuration  you can combine several alarm messages to form an     acknowledgement group     In this way you can acknowledge all other alarm  messages  consequential faults  in that acknowledgement group by  acknowledging the first alarm message  that is  the cause of the fault  without  all of them having to be displayed one after the other  You can configure up  to four acknowledgement groups     If alarm messages are not assigned to an acknowledgement group  only the    one that happens to be on the display is acknowledged if more are waiting     The possibility exists to suppress the display of frequently incoming alarm  messages for the duration which the C7 takes to boot up as a result of a warm  or cold restart     Password level 8 is the minimum level required to suppress the display     Zz   gt  F  To suppress an alarm message  press the    p and keys    simultaneously  This message will not be displayed until the ne
206. of visualizing data from the C7 CPU     Management    You configure the C7 OP using a computer  PC programing device  with the    configuration software ProTool or ProTool Lite  After completion of the  configuration  it is transferred to the C7 OP  To do this  you must connect the  computer to the C7 via an MPI interface     The project control phase commences once the configuration has been loaded  in the C7 OP  The C7 OP now reacts to the process signals from the C7 CPU  or operator actions in accordance with the configured instructions     Information regarding the configuration of the C7 OP can be found in the  ProTool or ProTool  Lite user manual     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    1 5    Introduction    1 3 C7 Overview    The SIMATIC C7 623 C7 624 control systems consist of several components  that are optimally tuned to one another     e A CPU of the SIMATIC S7 300 PLC range  C7 CPU   e A line oriented COROS OP  C7 OP  with printer port  e Integral digital and analog I O  C7 I O     e An integrated IM 360 module  C7 IM  for expanding the C7 623 or  C7 624 with S7 300 modules    e An interface for communicating with programming devices PCs and  further S7 CPUs  C7 control systems and OPs                                                                                                                          C7    C7 PLC  CPU memory     OP memory C7OP      C7CPU     C7 OP    C7     l      re VO aa i Printer      interface    C7 IM    MPI  interf
207. og inputs   Analog output   Universal inputs       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 9    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Analog Output Table 4 4 provides an overview of the analog output parameters   Parameters    Table 4 4 Analog Output Parameters       _ Value Range Preset Value  Basic setting  e Enable diagnostic alarm No    Diagnostics   e Enable Yes No      Configuration parameter error      Substitute value switched on    Substitute value    e Retain last value Yes No  e Value 94004   6C00H    Output range  e Type of output Deactivated Voltage  Voltage    Current       Output range   10V   20mA  4  20mA       Parameter Table 4 5 shows which parameters  e naracieriStics ol e Are static or dynamic  Analog Outputs 7    e Can be set     Table 4 5 Parameter Characteristics of Analog Outputs    Static Dynamic Effective Range    Enable diagnostic alarm Analog inputs    Analog output   Universal inputs    Substitute value    e Maintain last value Dynamic    e Value Dynamic       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  4 10 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 3 Representation of Analog Values    Overview The representation of analog values  or an analog value in binary form  is the  same for all C7 analog inputs and analog outputs     This chapter describes the analog values for all measurement ranges or  output ranges that can be used with the C7 analog I O   
208. ommunications ability of an    erased    C7 CPU to the external world must be  preserved even after a memory reset     MPI Addresses C7 The C7 occupies two MPI addresses   e One for the C7 CPU  default address 2   e One for C7 OP  default address 1     Parameter Block Table 3 15 lists the parameters of the parameter block    MPI addresses        MPI Addresses       Table 3 15 Parameter Block    MPI Addresses       Parameter Explanation Value Range Default  ion    Highest MPI address The definition of the highest MPI address in the  network is necessary since   e Every  network  station is addressable    e The communications process operates  effectively    Note  issue only as many MPI addresses as are  necessary  You will then reduce the communi   cations times     The    highest MPI address    must be the same for  all network stations     C7 CPU MPI address Each station that is networked via the MPI must   From 2 to 126  possess an address  The specified address may  only be allocated once in the network     The C7 OP possesses its own MPI address   default   1         Note    The MPI is the only communications interface of the C7  Parameters should  only be modified with utmost care     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 19    Control with the C7 CPU    3 6 Calculation of the Scan Cycle Time and Response Time of the    C7 CPU    In this Section    Definition   Cycle Time    Elements of the  Cycle Time    Definition   Response Time    3 20       This sec
209. on of a control job     Procedure            1  You must configure the interface module  which contains the interface    area  in the C7 CPU  example DB52      2  You enter the interface module  52  into the    area pointer    during the  configuration  The interface module is thus made known to the C7 OP     3  The job is entered in the interface module via the C7 CPU program   see fig 9 6      4  The C7 OP reads the interface module and carries out the job     Program for Screen Selection    AUF DB 52 Call interface module    L screen no  Enter first parameter  screen no   into  TDBW 6   job area of the interface module    L Input number  Enter 2nd parameter into   TDBW 8   job area of the interface module    L Field no  Enter 3rd parameter  field no   into  TDBW 10   job area of the interface module     L 51 Enter the job no  into the job area of the  interface module and activate the job        Figure 9 6 Example for a C7 CPU Program    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  9 18 C79000 G7076 C624 01    9 7 Recipes    Definition    Transferring data  records    Synchronization    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    A recipe is a group of variables for a fixed data structure  You set this struc   ture in your configuration and assign data to it on the C7   OP  You cannot  modify the structure on the C7   OP later     Since the data structure can be assigned several times  we refer to data re   cords  These data records are stored  created   loaded  
210. on the C7 CPU     2  Use STEP 7 to erase the load memory of the CP   CPU  remove delete  files  The function       Direct PLC  delete    may not be used in this case  since a memory a reset must be carried out     3  Activate the STEP 7 function    copy RAM to ROM     In this way  the  empty load memory will be    loaded    into the flash memory  Afterwards  this  is also empty     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 36 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and  Function of the C7 Input Output    In this Chapter       4    4 1 Slot Oriented Address Assignment for Signal  Modules    rement Range of the Analog Inputs     range of the Analog Outputs  2  of Analog Outputs  2  Period Time Measurement    4 5 Data Set Description for Parameter Block of C7  4  Analog I O and Universal Inputs       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 1    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 6 Examples for Programming the Analog I O and  the Universal Inputs    Block for Scaling Analog Output Values  Block for Scaling Analog Input Values  Example for Programming the Counters       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 2 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 1 Slot Oriented Address Assignment for Signal Modules    Overview The relationship between card slot and address assignment is described  below  You require this information to determine the start addresses of the  e
211. on value  value  PQW274  PQW277  PQW280      Set value   Bit 1 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  rising edge    O      I        New start comparison value will be  activated with the next rising edge at the  count  input      If forward counting running  new compari   son  value will be accepted        If backward counting running  new start  value  will be accepted  current count value will  be corrected by the difference        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 29    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 20 Control of Counters by the Application Program  Continued     Procedure    Initialization of the counter     At zero transition  backward counting  or compari    start of a new counting pro    son  cess  always occurs  value reached exceeded  forward counting     After setting the enable bit in the data area    Bit 0 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282   rising edge    O       gt    1      if the bit    set new start comparison value    is set  simultaneously    Bit 1 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282      Generation of process alarm Precondition is process alarm   yes of the  and resetting of counter counter has been assigned    When counting direction is forwards  if count  value   comparison value    When counting direction is backwards  if count  value   zero       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 30 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 4 5 Counter Alarms    Intro
212. one variable  Add to configuration and repeat  1 4 Information text not available download    2 Information text identifier not available  for messages    12 Process screen does not contain entries    3 6 7  Internal errors  8  11  13       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 25    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages     Message with one variable  Add to configuration and repeat  18 Screen title not configured download    Qto 8  Internal errors  34    Configuration error in x Add to or modify configuration and   X variable   repeat download  1 The screen or recipe entry is only set up   symbolically   The field is only set up symbolically   The message  entry or information text is not   configured for the   current language   Internal errors    The screen or recipe title is not configured  The process connection is only set up  symbolically   The information text is only set up  symbolically   The symbolic field is only set up symbolically  Fewer than 2 field texts are configured for a  symbolic field   The current field text is not configured for a  symbolic field   Invalid data format for a symbolic field   only KF and KY are permitted    Recipe setpoint configured with Char data  format   Invalid data format for setpoint field   Data format for the scheduler is too short  Invalid data format for actual control value  For fixed cross jump to menu  menu item  does not exist   For fixed cross jump to screen    entry or field
213. oo  Siemens Osakeyhtioe   OEM AUT 1  Hr  Saarelainen  Majurinkatu  P O B  60   T 003 58 O 51 05 36 70  Fax 0 03 58  0  51 05 36 56    Frankreich    69641 Caluire et Cuire Lyon  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Leitstelle    9 11  Chemin des Petites Brosses     BP 39     00 33  78 98 60 08  Fax 00 33  78 98 60 18    59812 Lesquin  Cedex Lille  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Leitstelle  78  Rue de Gustave Delroy   BP 239      00 33 20 95 71 91   Fax 00 33  20 95 71 86    33694 Merignac Ge deaux  Siemens S A   AUT 1   Leitstelle  Parc Cadera Sud  36  Avenue Ariane  BP 351   B  00 33  56 13 32 66  Fax 00 33  56 55 99 59    44300 Nantes   Siemens S A   AUT 1   Leitstelle  Zac du Perray  9  Rue du Petit Chatelier    00 33  40 18 68 30  Fax 00 33  40 93 04 83    93527 Saint Denis  Cedex 2 Paris  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Granger  39 47  Bd Ornano   T 0033 M 49 22 33 18   Fax 00 33  1  49 22 32 05    67016 Strasbourg  Cedex  Siemens S A   AUT 1  Leistelle  2  Rue du Rhin Napoleon   BP 48        00 33  88 45 98 22   Fax 00 33  88 60 08 40    31106 Toulouse   Siemens S A   AUT 1  Hr  Huguet  ZAC de Basso Cambo   Avenue du Mirail  BP 1304        00 33 62 11 20 15   Fax 00 33 61 43 02 20    Griechenland    15110 Amaroussio Athen  Siemens A E   HB 3 AUT   Hr  Antoniou  Paradissou  amp   Artemidos  P O B  6 10 11     0030 th  68 64 5 15  Fax 00 30  1  68 64 5 56    54110 Thessaloniki  Siemens A E   VB 3  Hr  Passalidis    AUT     Georgikis Scholis 89  P O B  10290    Fax 00 30  31  47 92 65    Grossbritannien   
214. ous OB and their user can be found in the  OB manual  280      Size of an OB An OB can have a maximum size of 8 Kbytes     OB for Scan Cycle Table 3 3 lists the OBs which determine the behavior of the C7 CPU during  and Start Up the scan cycle and start up     Table 3 3 List of OB for Scan Cycle and Start up    Scan Cycle and Start up Activated OB Possible Start Preset Priority of  Events the OB    Start up  STOP RUN transition  OB 100 1381  13824 Ls        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    OB for Internal and The Table 3 4 lists OBs which determine the behavior of the C7 CPU after  External Alarms alarm events     The priority of the OB cannot be changed     Table 3 4 List with C7 CPU Alarm Events    Alarms  Internal and External    Activated OB Possible Start Priority of the Priority  Events OB    Delay alarm OB 20 1121H 3  Range  1 ms to 60000 ms   adjustable in 1 ms increments     Watchdog alarm OB 35 1136H 12  Range  1 ms to 60000 ms   adjustable in 1 ms increments        Behavior of the The C7 CPU reverts to STOP if a  OOPER e Time of day alarm  Absent OB y  e Delay alarm  e Process alarm  e Diagnostics alarm  occurs  but the corresponding OB has not been programmed   The C7 CPU does not revert to STOP if a watchdog alarm occurs and OB 35  has not been programmed   OB for Error The Table 3 5 lists the OBs which determine the behavior of C7 CPU in an  Reactions error situation     The C7 CPU reverts to STOP 1f an error
215. parameters to the universal inputs     Digital input  Alarm input  Counter  Frequency counter    Period time counter    Universal Input The addresses for the universal inputs are default addresses which cannot be  Addresses changed  According to the application of the universal inputs  the results  occupy differing addresses     For the address allocation  differentiation is made 1n     4 20    Input range PIW280     PIB287 for count values or signal state of the    digital inputs  Output control range POW 274   PAB282 for counters    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Input Range The 4 universal inputs of the input range  see Figure 4 7  have the following  addresses and weightings     Table 4 15 Input Address of the Universal Inputs    PIW280 CI1  Counter input  PIW282 CI2  Counter input    PEB284 CI3  Counter input  PEB285 Frequency period time counter    PEB286    PEB287  Bit O   Current state of universal input 1    Bit 1   Current state of universal input 2  Bit 2   Current state of universal input 3  Bit 3   Current state of universal input 4    Bit 4    Bit 5   States of the count inputs see Table 4 15       States of the The state of the individual inputs is stored as a bit pattern in PEB287   Inputs    Table 4 16 State of the Inputs    Address State Indication of Universal  universal  Inputs  PEB287    Bit   1  universal input   set  Bit   0  universal input 1 reset   Bit   
216. peculiarity for OBs 121 and 122     The C7 CPU enters the value    0    in the following temporary variables of the  variable declaration table in the local data of the OBs     e Byte no  3  OB121_BLK_TYPE or OB122_BLK_TYPE  type of block  where error occurred    e Byte nos  8 and 9  OB121_ BLK NUM or OB122_BLK_NUM  number  of block where error occurred     e Byte nos  10 and 11  OB121_ PRG ADDR or OB122_PRG_ ADDR   address in block where error occurred     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 C 7 CPU Parameters    Configurable  Characteristics of  the C7 CPU    Tool for Parameter  Assignment    When Does the  C7 CPU    Accept     the Parameters    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    The characteristics and behavior of the C7 CPU can be configured     Parameter blocks of the C7 CPU     Clock memory  Start up characteristics  System diagnostics  Retentive areas  Process alarm   Real time clock  Time of day alarm  Watchdog alarm  Cycle behavior    MPI station addresses    The tool that you use to assign the parameters to the C7 CPU is the STEP 7  Function Hardware configuration  Working with Hardware configuration is  described in manual  100      The C7 CPU accepts the selected parameters    After POWER ON    After the parameters have been transmitted online and error free to the  C7 CPU in STOP mode     After erasing the C7 CPU  see  Chapter 2 3    If a SDBO is available on the integrated flash memory
217. perly  This mode must  therefore always be reset prior to exiting the menu with STOP   RUN or RUN P        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 2      Commissioning  Start Up     Mode Change  Protected by  Password    Exit the Mode  Menu    Select DI DO  Status Display    2 8    If a configuration is not loaded into the C7 OP  then you can change the  C7 CPU mode at any time without password protection     When a configuration has however been loaded    password protection is  activated to prevent uncontrolled C7 CPU mode change during process  control operations  The procedure is as follows     1  If the C7 CPU mode is to be changed  the active password level is  checked  password level  gt  8 is necessary      2  If the password level is not sufficient  the LOGIN screen for password    entry is automatically displayed  see Section 5 8     3  Enter password  e You can change the C7 CPU mode only with a valid password     e If no keys are operated within a time specified during the  configuration  an automatic log off is initiated  reset of the current  password level to  0   lowest level      e Ifa password for Level   8 has not yet been allocated  you can only  change the C7 CPU mode by means of the configured superuser  password  default 100      4  If the password has been recognized as valid  you can now change the  C7 CPU mode     J  You can exit the C7 CPU mode menu by pressing the key    The displayed values are read as a direct process image of the DI
218. ples of these functions are as follows         Display screen      Set date and time      Modify general settings    A control job consists of four data words  The first data word contains the job  number  Depending on the function  up to three parameters are transferred in  data words 2 to 4  Figure C   1 shows the general structure of a control job     Address Most significant byte  MSB  Least significant byte  LSB     Figure C 1 Structure of a Control Job       Note    Please refer to Section 9 6 for information on any provisions to be made in  the interface area     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Listing Table C 2 lists all the control jobs and their parameters which are possible  with the C7  No    Job number of the control job      Table C 1 Control Jobs with Parameters    Select C7 operating mode    Parameter 1 f Off line    Parameters 2 3    In general  jobs can only be initiated when the C7 is already in on line mode   Note   That means that the C7 can not be switched on line by a control job   Hardcopy    Parameter k23    Select contents directory    Parameter 1   Directory  Display screens  Directory  recipes  display  Directory  print screen  Directory  print recipes  Directory  recipes  data record  transfer   Parameters 2  3    Print out all process screens    Parameters 1  2  3    Print recipe with all data records    Parameters 2 Recipe number  1  99     Parameter
219. pose of data communication     Operating mode of the C7  in this mode  messages are displayed and entries  can be made in displays         Organization Block    The     Operating System of the C7 differentiates between various priority  classes  for example  cyclic program processing  process interrupt controlled  program processing  Each priority class is assigned     gt  Organization Blocks   OBs   where the S7 user can program a reaction  As a standard  the OBs  have different priorities to which they are processed when they occur  simultaneously or when they interrupt each other     The operating system of the C7 CPU organizes all functions and sequences of  the C7  which are not connected to a specific control task     Organization blocks  OBs  represent the interface between the operating  system of the C7 CPU and the user program  The sequence of user program  processing is defined in the organization blocks     Field for the display of an actual value     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Parameterization    Parameters    Parameters     Dynamic    Parameters   Static    Password  Password Level    PG    PLC    Process Image    Process Interrupt    Glossary    Parameterization is the act of defining the module characteristics     1  Variable of a STEP 7 code block   2  Variable for setting the module reaction  one or several per module   Each  module is supplied with a basic setting that can be changed by means of the  STEP 7 tool S7 Configuration
220. put  value and attaining the specified value at the analog output  is between 100  us and 2ms     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 16 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 8   Behaviour of Analog I O    Overview This section decribes     e The relationship of the analog input and output values to the supply  voltages of the analog I O and the operating modes of the C7     e The behaviour of the analog I O in relationship to the position of the  analog values in the respective value range     e The influence of errors on the analog I O     Influence of the The input and output values of the analog I O are dependent upon the supply  Supply Voltage voltage of the analog I O and the operating mode of the C7   and the Operating    The triggering of a diagnostic alarm is dependent upon the parameter  assignment     Mode    Table 4 11 gives an impression of these inter relationships     Table 4 11 Dependencies Between Analog Input and Output Values upon the Operating State of the C7 and upon  the Supply Voltage L     Operating state of C7 Input value of the analog input Output value of the analog output  POWER ON    STOP Process value Substitute value or  retain last value           _          AN       Influence of the The behaviour of the analog input is dependent upon the area of the value  Value Range on range in which the input value lies  Table 4 12 illustrates these dependencies  the Input for the analog input valu
221. r example  OPEN or CLOSED           Temp     Valve        Contents     Tank2    17 0  OPEN    1C    371 liters     gt  gt                    Figure 8 5 Screen with Input and Output Fields  Example     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Extended O I Functions    8 2 Controlling the C7 OP from the C7 CPU    Overview The C7 OP and the application program communicate with each other by  alternately reading and writing to the data areas  memory area pointers    Thus the C7 can bring about different actions through evaluation of these  user data areas     The user data areas are described in detail in Section 9 2     Various Actions The table below explains which actions can be controlled     Table 8 2 Control Functions    Control jobs Control jobs are functions that are initiated on the C7 CPU  for  example selecting screens  printing screens  transferring the date  and time  from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU   Jobs are submitted  with a job number and certain parameters     The C7 CPU can call up a screen  for example  to draw the    operators attention to a particular condition or to the fact that  inputs are required     The required interface is described 1    You will find a complete list of control jobs with their  parameters and a description of all the user data areas that have  to be configured on the C7 CPU in Appendix C 3     Note  Jobs sent from the C7 CPU to the C7 OP can be initiated only if  the C7 OP is in online mode     LED control The LEDs on t
222. race and sort the occurrence of individual diagnostics events     Diagnostics events are e g    e Errors in an I O  module    e System errors in the C7 CPU   e Change of operating modes  e g  from RUN to STOP     e Program errors in the CPU program    The I O diagnostics are divided into two groups     e Standard diagnostics  general malfunction of the C7 analog I O module  and universal inputs     e Module specific diagnostics    The standard diagnostics are always entered into the diagnostics buffers of  the C7 CPU after the occurrence of a diagnostics alarm  The precondition is  an assigned module diagnostic     The module specific diagnostics provide detailed information regarding the  type and possible cause of the error  This information can be called up by the  application program by means of special system calls  The precondition is  the assignment of a diagnostics enable  default setting is always       no    in this  case      You can select whether the analog input output diagnostics messages should  be generated using STEP 7     Using the STEP 7 Tool    S7 Configuration      you can also assign parameters  to the diagnostics behavior of the analog input output  1 e  you select whether  the analog I O diagnostics messages should be sent to the C7 CPU on  request  Furthermore  you can assign parameters to define whether the  module should trigger a diagnostics alarm in the C7 CPU after the  occurrence of an error     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624
223. ration  can be selected using these standard displays  The individual functions are  described in this manual with the help of standard screens  If you want to  work with these standard screens  you must load the supplied configuration     The standard screens contain functions that are fundamental to C7 operation   They include for instance  calling and printing message buffers  editing  passwords and modifying parameters on line  Process specific  implementations such as event messages or screens for the process  are not  included     Note    The standard screens  supplied with the standard configuration  call up the  so called special screens  which are loaded into the C7   s firmware  You can  call up these screens in your own configuration by using the function    Select  Special Screen        Standard screens are called from a basic screen by means of a soft key  From  the basic screen  a branch can be made to the following screens     e Event messages    At this point  the event buffer is called  printed or deleted   see also Section 7 1 1      e Alarm messages    At this point  the alarm buffer is called  printed or deleted     see also Section 7 1 1      e Screens    At this point  the screen contents directory is called to edit or print  screens  All the screens which were given the    directory    attribute  are  listed here  If you still have not created any screens of your own  the  directory will be empty  see alsof Section 7 5        e Data records  At this poi
224. re is possible  we will now speak of data records  Data  records are stored on the C7   OP which saves memory space on the C7   CPU     Example of a Let   s assume that orange nectar  orange drink and orange juice are to be   recipe produced using the same bottling station in a fruit juice plant  The mixing  ratios are different for each drink but the ingredients are the same  The  information required for production can be configured as the recipe  Mixture        Mixing station    To the bottling  station                                                                                                                                           Figure 7 6 Example of a fruit juice plant    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 25    Standard O I Functions    Components of a A recipe consists of a series of recipe entries  Each entry contains a  recipe maximum of one input field  1 e   variable   Depending on the configuration   either direct or symbolic value input can be used in an input field     The recipe called Mixture could be set up from the following entries     Name     Orange  EE  Water  a  ougar  sl  Aroma         Input fields  variables     In contrast to screens  several entries are displayed on the OP simultaneously    for recipes   Data records on On the OP  the variables allocated to the input fields are assigned with values  the OP and stored on the OP     Together  these values form one data record of the recipe     Several data records can be s
225. rlsruhe  AUT 14 P  Hr  Boltz  Bannwaldallee 48        0721  9 92 24 13  Fax  07 21  9 92 25 85    34117 Kassel  AUT P 13  Hr  Uhlig    B  rgermeister Brunner Str 15         05 61  78 86 3 32  Fax  05 61  78 86 4 48    87439 Kempten  AUT P  Hr  Fink  Lindauer Str  112       0831  58 18 2 25  Fax  08 31  58 18 2 40    24109 Kiel  AUT 1  Fr  Drews  Wittland 2 4    T  04 31  58  Fax  04 31  58  56068 Koblenz    AUT P 11  Hr  Ricke  Frankenstr  21    T  02 61   Fax  02 61     2 44    1 32   1 32 2 55    50823 K  ln  AUT P 14  Hr  Prescher  Franz Geuer Str  10        0221  5 76 27 62  Fax  02 21  5 76 27 95    AUT P  Fr  Wiest  Fritz Arnold Str  16       075 31  988 2 02  Fax  075 31  988 1 40    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    ZN    04105 Leipzig  AUT P 2  Fr  Kiesewetter  Springerstr  15    T  03 41   Fax  03 41     30 07    2 10   2 10 30 63    al  ai    39106 Magdeburg    AUT VG 33  Hr  Ganschinietz    Sieverstorstr  32 33        0391  5 88 17 21  Fax  03 91  5 88 17 22    68165 Mannheim  AUT 16 P  Hr  Sulzbacher  Dynamostr  4       06 21  4 56 28 43  Fax  06 21  4 56 25 45    81679 Munchen  AUT P 14  Hr  Schafer  Richard Strauss Str  76       0 89  92 21 30 64  Fax  0 89  92 21 43 99    48153 Munster  AUT S 13  Hr  Schlieckmann  Siemensstr  55          02 51  76 05 4 25  Fax  0251  76 05 3 36    90439 Nurnberg  AUT P 11  Hr  Glas  Von der Tann Str  30       09 11  6 54 35 87  Fax  09 11  6 54 73 84    49090 Osnabr  ck  AUT S 13  Hr  P  hler  Eversburger Str  32      
226. roller within  a specified period of time  This time was exceeded     Possible causes         Reception of the data record was not acknowledged by  the controller  user program         The data record is very large     The data record is transferred completely despite the  timeout       260 The controller mode  e g  manual mode  automatic mode   STOP mode  does not correspond to the configuration      261 A data set can no longer be used since the data is not  consistent          257 A data record was not stored in connection with the  currently loaded recipe version  If the data records  concerned are still to be used  the old version must be  entered in the recipe configuration  The assignment of the  values of a data record is defined in the recipe structure   If the structure was modified in a new configuration  an     old    data set may be interpreted incorrectly     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 19    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    requested or are no longer vaild  Ee      312 Print job rejected because similar job now being executed   Wait until previous job terminated   initiate again      313 Print job will be processed later because printer now busy      315 Information text has not been configured for highlighted  object  that is message  setpoint       316    317      318 Login attempted with invalid password      319 You entered and tried to edit an existing password      320 Enter password first  an
227. rt of Message Explanation    Message No  Details relating to the next field  message number of the system  message     The displayed message number is number 200   Date and time occurrence of the system message        Display Message Display message text of selected system message  D  Text Return to system message  KI    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 7 13    Standard O I Functions    7 1 6 Deleting Messages    Overview    Deleting Event and  Alarm Messages in  Standard Screens    Automatic Deletion  of the Alarm  Message Buffer  upon Buffer  Overflow    7 14    Event and alarm messages are stored automatically in the event and alarm  message buffers  respectively  Each of these buffers can contain as many as  256 events  To prevent a buffer from overflowing  you should delete event  and alarm messages from the buffer     Messages from the event and alarm message buffers are deleted either   e By means of a standard screen or  e Automatically upon buffer overflow     System messages are deleted automatically only when the buffer overflows     Standard screens can be used to delete    e All  not individual  acknowledged and departed alarm messages  e All  not individual  arrived and departed event messages   To delete event and alarm messages  proceed as follows     1  Depending on the type of message you want to delete  choose one of the  two standard screens  either Alarms     Delete  for alarm messages  or  Events     Delete  for event messages      
228. rwrite  Press ESCAPE   10  Exit standard screen with ESCAPE     As long as you have not confirmed an input value  you can terminate editing  with ESCAPE  The old value is then displayed again     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 1 29    Standard O I Functions    Storing a changed  data record as a  new data record    To save a changed data record as a new data record  do not overwrite the  called data record when exiting the input screen  Instead  enter a new data  record number and  if necessary  a new data record name before saving the  data record     1  Position cursor in the field for the data record number  enter the number   and confirm     2  Position cursor in the field for the data record name  enter the name  and  confirm  The data record name may not exceed 12 characters     The next time you call the data record directory  you will find the new data  record listed under the new data record number     7 4 2 Copying Data Records    Overview    Copying a data  record    7 30    There are two ways to copy a data record     e You can call an existing data record for editing  and save it unchanged  under a new number and  if necessary  under a new name  Then make  your changes     e Save an existing record via data record transfer under a new number and   if necessary  under a new name  Then make your changes in the copy     Proceed as follows to obtain a copy of a data record whose values you want  to change later     1  Call the data record to be 
229. s     How the Measured The tables 4 9 contain the digitized analog values for the various  Value Tables measurement ranges     Should be Read    Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same  the  tables contain only the comparison of the measurement ranges to the units     These tables are therefore clearer and easier to read  The corresponding  binary representation of the measured values can be referred to in Table 4 8     Measured Value The bits identified with    x    are not relevant to a resolution of 12 bits   Resolution    Table 4 8 Possible Resolutions of Analog Values    Resolution in Bit Analog Value       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 12 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Voltage and Table 4 9 contains the representation of the digitized voltage measurement  Current ranges for   10V and the digitized current measurement ranges  20 mA   Measurement 4   20 mA    Ranges   Table 4 9 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value of the Analog Inputs  Voltage and Current    Measurement Ranges     Measuring   Measuring   Measuring Units  Range re   20 oe    11 7589 32511 7EFFYH  Upper range  10 0004 20 0007 6COly    Nominal range        10 0004     20 0007 Underflow  range  Lower range       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 13    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 5 Representation of Analog Values for the Output Range
230. s     which can be increased  by alarms or communications via the MPI of the C7 CPU     Table 3 17 Process image update of the C7 CPU    T O Configuration Process Image Update Times    1 C7  16 bytes  approx  200 us  on approx  150 us    C7   3 racks  64 bytes       approx  850 us  ae approx  600 us  C7   3 racks  128 bytes   max  configuration  PH  approx 1480 us  PIQ  approx 1020 us       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 26 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    3 6 1 Calculation Example for the Cycle Time    Component Parts To recap  The cycle time consists of the following     of the Cycle Time    Process image transfer time  Operating system execution time  User program execution time    Processing time for S7 timers    Example The user program in the C7 CPU has an execution time of 1 5 ms  Your user  program uses four S7 timers     In the C7 CPU  you have done without the C7 CPU self test and  since the  C7 CPU 1s a stand   alone unit  the cycle is not loaded with communication  tasks     Calculation In the example  the cycle time is calculated from the following times     Execution of S7 timer    1 F    Process image transfer time       Process image input table  approx  0 2 ms      Process image output table  approx 0 15 ms  Operating system run time       Cycle control  approx  0 87 ms       Rack monitoring  approx  0 05 ms   User program execution time  approx  1 5 ms  Processing time for S7 timers   For four S7 timers  the single update takes    4 x 7 
231. s  Value    at Measurement range 0 Deactivated   3 4  20mA  4  20mA  if measurement  type current  9  10V   if measurement type voltage     type current  9  10V    08 J l Measurement type 0 Deactivated  1 Voltage  2 Current  Cycle end alarm     0 No  1 Yes  only if Byte 4  lt  gt 1   09 n Measurement range 0 Deactivated   3 4  20mA  4  20mA  if measurement   if measurement type voltage          These 4 bits are ORed during evaluation as only one analog measuring  cycle is available     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 41    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 6 Examples for Programming the Analog I O and the Universal Inputs    Overview    The following examples for programming the analog I O and the universal  inputs of counters will help you to get familiar with the principles for  programming the C7 I O     The three following examples are contained in this section   e Block for scaling analog output values  e Block for scaling analog input values    e Block for programming the counters    4 6 1 Block for Scaling Analog Output Values    Function of Block    Summary of  Formulae    FC127 Sequence  of Statements    4 42    The FC127 block is used to convert the setpoint to be specified in a memory  double word as floating point number to the corresponding hexadecimal  pattern   analog value  which must be output to a peripheral output word   For this purpose  a simple calculation using the rule of three is programme
232. s 2  3       C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 7    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     Select special screens    The following screens integrated in the firmware can be selected via their  fixed   object number     Parameter 1 n 6  Cursor lock  O off 1 on   n 7  Special screen number    Alarm message buffer   1 Buffer output   2 Output message number  3 Overflow warning on off  4 Delete buffer yes no    Event message buffer   1 Buffer output   2 Output message number  3 Overflow warning on off  4 Delete buffer yes no    PG functions  25 Status VAR  26 Control VAR    Special functions   30 Language  brightness   contrast    31 Change operating mode    Settings   35 Adjust date time  36 V 24 interface   38 Printer parameters  40 Message type    Message text  45 Display alarm message  46 Display event message    System messages  50 Output system message buffer    Password  59 Login  56 Password input    C7 system functions   97 C7 system function menu  98 C7 CPU mode selection  99 DI DO status display    Parameters 2 3      Message logging on off    Parameter 1    Parameters s2  3       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     Switching language    Parameter 1    Parameters 2  3    Set time    Parameter 1       Eee    Parameter 2 
233. sasummary  this means all messages contained in the buffer of the  type of message concerned are printed in ascending message number  order  If a message occurs more than once  it is slotted in according to  time related criteria     The default setting is chronological  The default setting can be modified  during configuration  An on line choice of either Chronological or  Summary is only possible when it has been correspondingly configured     Activate Printer Select the standard screen Alarms     Print to print out the alarm messages  or Events     Print to print out the event messages     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 7 17    Standard O I Functions    7 2 Screens    Overview    Screen Structure    Screen Directory    Selecting Screens    7 18    The C7   s process is displayed and administered on the screens  that is a  processing machine or mixing station   The responsible person configures the  screens for the relevant user specific applications     Logically associated process values are acquired and displayed on screens to  provide an overview of a process or system  In addition to this alphanumeric     imaging    of the processes  the screens provide a means of entering process  values and consequently a means for controlling the process  You can  configure up to 99 screens for the C7     Example  Process values on a screen can be randomly assigned to subject  related groups  An example of this is shown in Figure 7 5           Furnace 1 tempera
234. screen number area   system keyboard image  9 9   Data area retentive   Data record  C7 CPU   gt  C7 OP   C7    OP   gt  C7 CPU   recipes  9 19  transfer   synchronization   Data record name     Data Records       Date and time     DB   Decimal places   Default poes eel 6 28  Delay alarm   Delete  alarm message   event message   Delete key     Deleting  alarm message buffer   7 14     event messages   messages   password   Deleting process  alarm messages  7  14   DI DO status display   exit   explanation   select     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Index    Diagnostic entry  channel specific   Diagnostic evaluation   Diagnostic events   Diagnostics   alarm   4 18    analog input    analog output    C7 I O  5 2   enabled    entry    parameter asignen SA   parameter block  FOE  Diagnostics alarm  oe  Diagnostics area  Eo 5 4 4  Diagnostics buffer   Diagnostics Error  temporary   Diagnostics error  permanent   Diagnostics messages   reaction           DIR key  7 19   Direct  message logging  7 16  Directory key  6   Display    alarm message   6 7  C 4   contrast  C 10  height     technology   Display function   Display priority   Display variant  mixed   seperat   Displaying  messages   password list   Download   6 13   Dynamic  parameters     Digital 1 z   universal inputs           E    Enable diagnostic alarm  4 8   Enabled  diagnostics   End alarm  alarm cycle   Enter key     Enter string     Entering password  automatic  6 27     4 10        Index 3
235. se time   Internal interrupt preparation time   input  delay    The times are listed in the data sheet for the respective digital input  module    e Analog input modules  Process interrupt response time   Internal interrupt preparation tme    conversion time    The internal interrupt preparation time of the analog input modules can be  neglected  Please refer to the data sheet of the respective analog input  module for conversion times     Process interrupt handling begins when the process interrupt OB  OB 40  is  called  Higher   priority interrupts cause the process interrupt handling routine  to be interrupted  Direct accesses to the I O are made at the execution time of  the instruction  When the process interrupt handling routine has finished   either cyclic program execution continues or further interrupt OBs of higher  priority or the same priority are called up and executed     To recap  the process interrupt response time is composed of   e The process interrupt response time of the CPU  e The process interrupt response time of the signal module    Example  In the example  the C7 I O is to be used exclusively     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Calculation    Control with the C7 CPU    For the example  the process interrupt response time is calculated from the  following times     e Process interrupt response time of the C7 CPU  approx  1 1 ms  e Process interrupt response time of the module        Internal interrupt preparation time  0 6 ms  
236. software 0 no  1   yes  only for 4  20mA     Measurement underrange 0  no  1   yes  underflow        Measurement overrange 0  no  1   yes  overflow     Channel Specific Diagnostics Byte AI4    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  5 6 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Diagnostics    Table 5 2 Layout of the Diagnostics Area  Continued     Byte   Bit Meaning Explanation Value  Range  0    Parameter error in parameters for  channel    Wire breack in software O no      yes  only for 4  20mA     Measurement underrange O no  1   yes  underflow     Measurement overrange O no  1   yes  overflow     Channel type AQ of the following channel specific diagnostics information  13 0  7   Number of analog output 1  channels  14   0  7   Number of diagnostics bits per  channel    15    Channel Vector for Channel Group AQ  Ea Collective error in AQI O no  1   yes Oll       Analog inputs will be reset until the channel functions again    Exception  parameter assignment for wire break check for  setting  lt  gt 4   20mA  AI 7FFFH           Analog output will be reset until channel functions again  AQ 0V OmA         Counters will be reset until channel functions again  CI FFFFH  FC IC  FFFFFFH     x x    NO process alarm  no diagnostics alarm  no disturbance on the analog  I O bit 0 of byte 0  0     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 5      Diagnostics    5 3 Constraints and Interactions of the Diagnostics Evaluation    Overview The diagnostics entries are interdependent  For example  the me
237. splay contents  from the C7 OP to the C7 CPU  and from there  to trigger certain reactions   like calling up another screen for example     If the screen number area is to be used  it must be declared as an    area  pointer    in the configuration  It can only be placed once and in one C7 CPU     The screen number area is spontaneously transferred  That means the transfer  always happens if a change 1s registered at the C7 OP  In this case you do not  need to configure a polling time     The screen number area is a data area with a fixed length of 2 data words     The layout of the screen number area for the C7 OP in the control memory is  represented below     7 O  7 0  Current Input number Current Input field number    lst word    2nd word       Current input field number Oto 8  0  Input field number       All bytes of the screen number area are assigned with FFy in the message  level and for the display of a contents directory     For special screens  se   Section C  3  the screen number area is assigned as    follows     lst word    2nd word    7 0  7 o   Current input field number       C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Data Areas for Communication between the C7 OP and the C7 CPU    9 6 Interface Area    Overview    Layout of the  Interface Area       The interface area is only necessary for the C7 CPU if its functions are to be  used or evaluated by the C7 CPU     The interface area must be configured if you want to use the following  functions 
238. ssage on the  error    wire break       can only become effective if the diagnostics entries     external error    and    channel error    are set simultaneously     Constraints for These interactions are illustrated in Table 5 3  Error Entry    Table 5 3 Constrants and Interactions of the Error Entries    ByteO  Bit 1  1 Internal error    Byte7 Evaluate channel vector if req     Wire break  Byte 8  9  10  11  Bit 4   1 channel specific diagnostics  bytes AI  E P     Underrange  Byte 8  9  10  11  Bit 6   1 channel specific diagnostics  bytes AI  E P M     Overrange  Byte 8  9  10  11  Bit 7   1 channel specific diagnostics  bytes AI  E P M     Byte 0  Bit7 1 Incorrect parameter  Byte 8 9 10 11   Bit 0   1 channel specific diagnostics bytes AI  P     Byte15  Bit 0   1 Collective error AO  only parameter error possible    P     Byte 0   Bit 6   1 Module not assigned parameters    Legend        E   temporary  correction by alteration at connector   P   permanent  reset by use of correct parameter   R   permanent  remove by RESET  complete erasure and restart  of C7 CPU  or exchange of equipment   M   temporary  disappears after new measurement    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  5 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Reaction to  Diagnostics  Messages  user   Table 5 4 Diagnostics Messages and Reaction Possibilities    Reason for the Source of Error  Diagnostics    Message    Module not  assigned parame   ters    During the start up of the  module  if no parameters  were assigned to the  C
239. t  C7 CPU  by means of diagnostic interrupts     Representation of logically related process data for display and modification  in the C7 either in groups or individually     Interval between the arrival of an event message and reaching of the  back to normal state     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Display Entry    Display Function    Display Level    Event Message    Fault Message    Fault Time    FB    FC    Flash EPROM    Forced Printout    Glossary    Element of a display  It consists of the entry number  text and variables     Function that causes a change of the display contents  for example  display of  message level or display of fault message buffer     Processing level of the C7 at which displays can be monitored and operated     It draws the operator   s attention to certain operating states in the machine or  plant to which the C7 is connected     It points out particularly critical operating states  A fault message always  requires an acknowledgement     Interval between the arrival of a fault message and reaching of the  back to normal state         Function Block        Function    With regard to their characteristic to retain data in the case of a power  failure  FEPROMs correspond to the electrically erasable EEPROMs  but can  be erased much faster  FEPROM   Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only  Memory      The following data can be held in flash memory without being affected by a  power failure     e The     User Program     e The 
240. t a correction  factor of     4 ms      Example  If the real time clock is two seconds  slow after seven days  the correction factor is to  be calculated as follows   2 seconds   7 days   286 ms day consequently   you have to set a correction factor of  286        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 15    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 7 Parameter Block    Time of Day Alarms       Overview The C7 CPU can trigger Time of Day alarms which you can activate and  assign parameters via the parameter block       Time of Day alarms        Priority The priority of the OB 10 is fixed at the value 2  You cannot change this  value    Parameter Block Table 3 12 lists the parameters of the parameter block       Time of Day alarms         Time of Day   Alarms       Table 3 12 Parameter Block       Time of Day Alarms       Explanation Value Range Default Setting  Active OB 10 Activation of OB 10    Execution OB 10 Here you set the execution intervals in which the None  time of the day alarm should be triggered  The Once only  execution interval refers to the start date and the Every minute  start time setting  Every hour   Every day    Every week  Every month  Every year    Start date OB 10 The start date on which the time of day alarm 1994 01 01  should be triggered     Start time OB 10 The start time at which the time of day alarm 00 00 00  should be triggered  The start time can only be  entered in hours and minutes        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  3 16 C79000 G70
241. ter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    The universal counter inputs are controlled by the application program     The control possibilities you have in the application program  to influence the counters are explained in Table 4 20     Table 4 20 Control of Counters by the Application Program    Aim Procedure    Start counter Enter a valid start value Gf backward counting   or a valid comparison value   PQW274  PQW277  PQW280    Activate the new start comparison value   Bit 1 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  rising edge    O       gt    1      Start the counter by selecting the start bit   Bit 0 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  falling edge    O          1      Stop counter Reset the start bits   Bit 0 of PQB276  PQB279 PQB282  falling edge    O         1       Restart counter with counter If necessary  enter a new start value or retain old  initialization  reset  start value  for backward counting  or comparison  value  for forward counting   PQW274  PQW277     PQW280     e Activate the new start comparison value   Bit 1 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  rising edge    0       gt    1       Set the start bit   Bit 1 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  rising edge    O     gt    1           Restart counter without No setting of the new start comparison value  counter initialization  counter    i Start the counter by setting the start bit  continues counting without a  Bit 0 of PQB276  PQB279  PQB282  reset  rising edge   0      1         Select new start comparison Enter new start comparis
242. the buffer and the  number of the alarm messages still existing     Return to alarm message list     Select the standard screen Events     View    The messages received in the event message buffer are now displayed in the  event message list  They are categorized with message number  date and  time  occurrence and message status  arrived or departed            Message No  045 K  on 12 04 95 10 23 50  Message No  031 G  on 12 04 95 09 51 43                      Figure 7 3 Example Display of the Event Message Buffer  C7 623     Table 7 5 Explanation of Figure 7 3    Part of Message Explanation  Details relating to next field  Message number of event message  The displayed event message is number 045        Display message text relating to selected event message  D     lt      Return to event message list     Select the standard screen Event     Number   Here you receive an overview of all event messages in the buffer and the  number of the alarm messages still existing     Select the standard screen System     gt  SysMsg     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    The messages contained in the system message buffer are now shown on the  display together with details of the message number  and the date and time of  their occurrence        Message no  200 on 12 04 95 10 23 50  Message no  200 on 12 04 95 10 24 00          Figure 7 4 Example Display of System Message Buffer  for C7 624     Table 7 6 Explanation of Example in Figure 7 4  Pa
243. the condition that the universal    inputs are designed for a maximum frequency of 10kHz  The minimum  period time of 0 1 ms follows  Therefore the upper threshold frequency is 10  kHz  corresponding to 600 000 rev min      If this frequency is exceeded  then the input values will be erroneous  since  individual pulses will be suppressed by the input filter  of 10 kHz      The relative measuring discrepancy gets smaller as the period time increases     Thresholds These thresholds are applicable for a transducer that generates one pulse per  revolution  If you use transducers that generate several pulses per revolution   then you must reconsider the threshold frequencies     Counter Overflow The counter value FF FF FFy indicates a shortfall of the lower threshold   A diagnostic report will not be generated in this case     Parameter In order to use the universal input 3 as a period time counter  this must also  Assignment be assigned as such  parameters   This is performed with the STEP 7  Function Hardware configuration     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 38 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 5 Data Set Description for Parameter Block of C7 Analog I O and  Universal Inputs    Overview If a reassignment is to be performed during normal process operations  then  the validity and inter relationships between the individual parameters must  be examined by the application program     Incorrect value ranges of the para
244. the configuration has already not been loaded    How you can activate the C7 CPU operational modes RUNP  RUN   STOP and MRES    How you can activate the DI DO status indication    How you perform a memory reset of the C7 controller    Start up Characteristics and Commissioning    22 C7 CPU Mode Selection and DI DO Status  Indication    Memory Reset of the C7       Load Erase C7 CPU Flash EPROM    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    2 1    Commissioning  Start Up     2 1 Start Up Characteristics and Commissioning    Start Up After connecting the power supplies  the C7 performs a self test  During this  test  it checks the functionality of the most important device components and  shows the test results on the status LED and display  The following start up  procedure is followed     1  The C7 performs a self test after POWER ON     2  If the configuration has not been loaded  a contrast setting is requested   You must confirm this with when the display is easily readable     3  The C7 performs an operating system test     4  During the start up phase  1  and 3    the C7 CPU remains in the STOP  mode  After start up  the C7 is in the message mode  The following  standby messages is displayed           SIMATIC C7 Vx  XX    C7 623                      Figure 2 1 C7 623 Standby Message    5  After start up of the C7  the previously selected C7 CPU mode is valid     The following states can occur in the C7  These determine your further  actions     e No control
245. the inputs and outputs     e Case 1  An output channel is enabled when a digital input signal is read  in  The response time is     Response time   4 8 ms   5 ms   9 8 ms   10 ms     e Case 2  An analog value is read in and an analog value is output  The  response time is     Response time   2 5 ms  5 ms   0 9 ms   3 9 ms   4 ms     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 29    Control with the C7 CPU    3 6 3 Process Interrupt Response Time    Process Interrupt  Response Time    Calculation    C7 CPU    Signal Modules    Process Interrupt  Handling    Calculation  Example    3 30    The process interrupt response time is the time that elapses between the first  occurrence of a process interrupt signal and the calling of the first instruction  in the process interrupt OB  OB 40      In general  higher   priority interrupts take precedence  That means the  process interrupt response time is increased by the program execution time of  the higher   priority process interrupt OBs and process interrupt OBs of the  same priority  which have not yet been processed     The process interrupt response time is calculated as follows     Process interrupt response time   Process interrupt response time of the C7  CPU   process interrupt response time of the signal module    The process interrupt response time of the C7 CPU is 1 1 ms     The process interrupt response time of the signal modules is calculated as  follows     e Digital input modules    Process interrupt respon
246. the password is Password 100  This can be  changed during configuration     Select the standard screen Password     Edit     The password list is displayed  A maximum of 50 passwords is possible           Password level    Password  Password index                         Figure 6 7 Example of a Password List    Table 6 5 Explanation of Terms in Figure 6 7    Legend in Diagram Explanation    Password index The two digit number at the start of the password entry  is the password index  If no password is entered for a  defined password index  the fields for the passwords  are represented by dotted lines     Password To the right of the password index is the field for the  actual password  The password must be a minimum of  3 and a maximum of 8 characters long  It can be made  up of digits and the letters A F     Password level When the password list is first called up  it contains  only the entry of the super user        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Issue of Password  and Password  Level    Changing  Password and  Password Levels    Deleting  Password       Operating the C7  General     A password and password level are issued according to the following  procedure     Select the line for password entry in the   The cursor is positioned on the  password list  first character of the field for the  password input     Enter a password that does not yet exist  and confirm it  A leading zero in the  password is not valid     3  Position the cursor to the rig
247. then bottled in the  correct quantities  The bottles are transported on a con   veyor  belt  Before being filled  they are checked for damage   After  they have been filled  the bottles are capped  labeled  and  transferred to pallets   Basic Screen The C7 623   s configured basic screen could look like the one shown in    Figure 8 3  The basic screen consists of static text only           Unit 1    Mix Bottle   lt  lt       gt  gt                       Figure 8 3 Start Screen for the Mixing and Bottling System  C7 623     The screen segment on the display can be selected with the softkeys below  the symbols  You can shift the screen horizontally using the softkeys  lt  lt  and   gt  gt      Select     Mix    Pressing the softkey beneath the    Mi x    entry allows you to view the entry  shown in Figure 8 4  It similarly consists of static text which refers to other  screens   Tank2        Tank3    and    Mixer                  Mixing unit    Tank2 Tank3 Mixer   lt  lt                             Figure 8 4 Screen with Static Text  Example     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 8 5    Extended O I Functions    Select    Tank2       8 6    If you press the       Tank2    softkey  the entry displayed in Figure 8 5 appears   The entry contains the static text and two output fields  tank contents and set  temperature  as well as an input field  valve position   The position of the  tank valve can be set in the input field by means of a symbolic value input    fo
248. this way  the  screen that has been permanently defined during  configuration can be selected in any operating  situation     Selecting by directory Call the standard screen via Screens     Edit  The  screen directory is shown in the display  It contains  only screens which were included in the directory  during configuration  You can scroll through the  screen directory using the arrow keys  A screen is  chosen by pressing RETURN    As an alternative to the standard screen Screens     gt   Edit you can call the screen directory using the DIR  key on the system keyboard  A screen chosen with  ENTER can be edited but not printed     Selecting with a control job   For a guided operation  you can select a screen from  the C7 CPU by means of a control job  In this  instance  the cursor is already positioned in a specified    entry or in an input field  in which the operator can  perform input  see alsg  section 9 6        Exiting Screen You leave the screen level by pressing       ESC      Level    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 7 19    Standard O I Functions    Editing Screens Screens can be manipulated  this means edited  by means of entries in input  fields and combined input output fields  To edit a screen proceed as follows     1  Select the screen you wish to edit as The screen is displayed  The cur   described under    Select Screen    sor jumps to the first input field   2    Move to the required field using the keys   The cursor is positioned on the
249. tion describes the C7 analog I O and universal inputs with regard to  their module specific diagnostics messages     Table 5 1 provides an overview of the channel specific diagnostics messages  of the analog input     The diagnostics information is allocated to the individual channels     Table 5 1 Diagnostics Message of the Analog Input    M short circuit    Wire break  only for 4 20mA by software     Underrange  underflow        Reference error    Overrange  overflow     Only one collective error exists for the analog output   Possible causes of the collective error could be     e Parameter error    e Substitute value is connected    The diagnostics area consists of   e Data set 0  the standard diagnostics bytes  0   3     e Data set 1  the channel specific diagnostics bytes  for enabled  diagnostics          Byte 4  7 and byte 8  11   channel and individual information analog  input  AI  diagnostics        Byte 12  15   channel information  analog output AO  diagnostics    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Diagnostics    Table 5 2 illustrates the layout of the diagnostics area and the meaning of the    individual entries     Table 5 2 Layout of the Diagnostics Area    Byte   Bit Meaning Explanation Value  Range    Module fault  Internal error  External error    Channel error    External auxiliary voltage absent  Front plug absent    Module not assigned parameters    Incorrect parameters    Module class  Module class  Module class  Module class    Syst
250. tion explains how the cycle and response times of an user program  are structured     Use the programming device to read the cycle time of the user program on  the C7 CPU  see programming manual  280       We will show you how to calculate the cycle time using an example   The response time is of greater interest  however  This chapter includes a    detailed description of how to calculate the response time     The cycle time is the time that passes during a program cycle     The cycle time comprises the following elements   e Process image transfer time  PII and PIQ    e Operating system run time   e User program processing time    Diagram 3 2 shows the elements of the cycle time    The sections  enclosed by the  dotted lines form a  time unit in which  no user program is  processed     user pro   gram    Figure 3 2 Elements of the Cycle Time    The response time is the time that elapses between the recognition of an  input signal and the change to the associated output signal     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Factors    Variation Range    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    The response time is dependent upon the following factors     Process image transfer time  Operating system run time  user program processing time  Communications via the MPI    Inherent delays in the inputs and outputs    The actual response time lies between a shortest and a longest response time   During the configuration of yo
251. tion of the C7 Input Output    With the    S7 status    function of the STEP 7  the following can be monitored     PIW280 current counter value C1   MW20 counter image Cl   PIW282 current counter value C2   MW22 counter image C2   PIW284 current counter value C3   MW24 counter image C3   MB40 number of alarms triggered by Cl  MB41 number of alarms triggered by C2  MB42 number of alarms triggered by C3  PIB287 status of alarms    The OB100 complete restart block contains the following statements     ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB 100    var_temp  start_info   array 0  19  of byte   end_var  BEGIN       Resetting the counters     L 0     explicit stopping of all counters  T PQB276     C1  T PQB279     C2  T PQB282   1 C3    CALL SFC 47    WT  10000    wait so that STOP becomes effective             Setting comparison values     L 10     setting comparison value Cl  T PQW274   L 20     setting comparison value C2  T PQW277   L 40     setting comparison value C3  T PQW280        Declaring comparison values valid and starting counter     L 3     declaring comparison value valid and starting  T PQB276  Cl  T PQB279     C2  T PQB282   1 C3    END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    4 51    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    OB1 Statement OB 1 contains the following statements   Sequence ORGANIZATION_BLOCK OB1  var_temp    start_info   array 0  19  of byte   status   BYTE     end_var   BEGIN        Fvaluation if 
252. transferred   pof the function keyboard image is described in    Ne Mak e U  Section 9 4 2     System keyboard A bit is permanently assigned to every key on the system    image keyboard  apart from the cursor keys and the directory key  in  the data area for system keyboard bits  The bit remains set for as  long as the corresponding key is pressed  The bit is reset when  you release the key     Due to the evaluation of this data area  the operator   s attention  can be drawn to the wrong operation of a key   for example  by  means of an error message    The make up of the system keyboard image is described in    Section 9 4 1     Date and time Transfer of date and time can be initiated from the C7 OP by  means of a control job in order to synchronize the C7 OP and  the C7 CPU     Acknowledgement   By configuring a suitable data area  area pointer   alarm  area C7 CPU    gt  messages can also be acknowledged by the C7 CPU    C7 OP application program  instead of from the I O part   See also    Acknowledgment By configuring a suitable data area  area pointer   the C7 CPU  area C7 OP      application program  can be told that an alarm message has    C7 CPU been acknowledged  se   Section 9 3         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  8 8 C79000 G7076 C624 01    8 3 Schedulers    Overview    Functions    Changing  schedulers    Extended O I Functions    Depending on the configuration  you can specify so   called schedulers for the  C7 624  A scheduler is a regularly recurring point 
253. ts  outputs  memory bits  times  counters  data  at a specified position and thus control  the user program directly     Block status Observe a block with regard to the program sequence to aid commissioning and fault finding     Block status offers the possibility of observing certain register contents during the execution  of statements   e g  AKKUs  address register  status register  DB register        C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 35    Control with the C7 CPU    3 8 Load Erase C7 CPU Flash Memory    Overview During transmission of an user program to the C7 CPU  it is transmitted only  to the load memory and not automatically into the C7 CPU flash memory  also     The contents of a C7 CPU flash memory are not automatically reset during a  memory reset of the C7 CPU     You must explicitly initiate these actions     Load user You must explicitly load the C7 flash memory using the STEP 7 function  Program into Flash    copy RAM to ROM     You do this after you have copied the program and  Memory data into the load memory  In this way  the whole contents of the load    memory is transmitted to the flash memory     Erase Flash After the memory reset  the load memory is reinitialized with the contents of   Memory the flash memory  However  since you can change the contents of the flash  memory only using the STEP 7 function    copy RAM to ROM     you must  proceed in the following manner to erase the flash memory     1  Select all OBs  FBs  FCs and DBs 
254. ture  80   C  Furnace 2 temperature  78   C  Furnace 1 contents  1200 1  Furnace 2 contents  3000 1                      Figure 7 5 Example for Thematically Grouped Process Values  C7 623     A screen consists of the following components   e A title  optional   max  character count  display width less 3   e Screen entries  max  99     e A return destination  reached by pressing the ESC key  Possible return  destinations are         The message level      Another screen      A screen directory        The point at which the current screen was chosen    During configuration  screens can be grouped in a screen directory which is  used to display them on the screen or print and edit them  A screen can be  retrieved from its screen directory by its screen number and its screen title  if  configured      The C7 screens can be viewed  serviced  edited  and printed  Before this is  possible  they have to be selected     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    A screen can be easily selected by the following means   e Soft key   e Function key   e Directory contents   e Control job    The various selections are explained in Table 7 7     Table 7 7 Selection Possibilities for a Screen    Selecting with the soft key You can branch from one screen to another using soft  keys  The branch is defined in the configuration     Selecting with the function   The configured assignment of the function keys is   key valid globally  unlike the soft keys  In 
255. uding rights created by patentgrantorregistration  of a utility model or design  are reserved     Siemens AG   Automation Group   Industrial Automation Systems  Postfach 4848  D 90327 Nurnberg    Disclaimer of Liability    We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the  hardware and software described  Since deviations cannotbe precluded  entirely  we cannot guarantee full agreement  However  the data in this  manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in  Subsequent editions  Suggestions for improvement are welcomed        Siemens AG 1995  Technical data subject to change        Siemens Aktiengesellschaft    C79000 G7076 C624    Contents    1 IMrOGUCHOMN  s2c 4sectedeeet bese ea teee re Peete eeeeaedteecenoeuseee ss H 1  1 1 Control with the C7 2 0    cc eee eee n eens 1 2  1 2 Operator Control and Monitoring with C7          0 0    0c 1 3  1 3 CT OVEIVICW aiisiG tats oe Hace Saeed 2 OKA Oe AAs Se A ORS wee 1 6   2 Commissioning  Start Up              cece eee eee eee 2 1   2 1 Start Up Characteristics and Commissioning                00e0eeeee 2 2  2 2 C7 CPU Mode Selection and DI DO Status Display                     2 5  2 3 Memory Reset of the C7           ccc nee 2 10  2 4 Load Erase C7 CPU Flash Memory               0 00 c cece eee eens 2 12   3 Control with the C7 CPU           0    ccc eee een enna  3 1 C7 CPU  OVCIVWEW serrirerenrt inin roar EE nthe hen aobe mane eeaabes  3 2 Programming the C7 CPU          ccc ne nes  3
256. ule time  limits    if you are not sure of the required times in the C7     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 3 11    Control with the C7 CPU    3 5 3 Parameter Block    System Diagnostics       Definition  System diagnostics perform the acquisition  evaluation and reporting of an  System error within the automation device  The cabling to the process is also  Diagnostics included in the system diagnostics so that  for example     wire breakage    can    be recognized by the system diagnostics     Example Examples for errors that can be identified  evaluated and reported by the  system diagnostics are     e Errors in the user program  e Failure of hardware modules    e Breaks in wiring to transducers    Parameter Block Table 3 8 lists the parameters of the parameter block    System Diagnostics        System   Diagnostics      Table 3 8 Parameter Block    System Diagnostics       Explanation Value Range Default Setting    Extended diagnostics For    Extended diagnostics buffer entries   yes     Yes No No  buffer entries then the C7 CPU enters not only the error events  into the diagnostics buffer but also all OB calls        Transmission of diag    For    Transmission of diagnostics messages       Yes No Yes  nostics messages after   yes     then the C7 CPU transmits the cause of  reversion to the STOP   STOP via the multipoint  MPI  interface to the  mode display system  programming device  OP   This  diagnostic message is the    youngest    entry in the  di
257. umber   1   4   Parameter 2 LED image word 0  Parameter 3 LED image word 1  LED image  a  Area pointer    Note     The difference between this job and job 42  fetch LED area from C7 CPU  is as  follows  With job 47  the LED image is also transferred resulting in a faster  control of the LEDs     The declared LED area may not be configured larger than 2DW     Menu selection  Parameter 1 Menu no in the standard menu  l Message level  2 Main menu  3 Alarm messages  12 Print alarm messages  4 Event messages  14 Print event messages  5 Screens  6 Recipes  7 Statistical functions  18 Alarm statistics  19 Event statistics  8 PU functions  9 Special functions  24 System messages  23 Message texts  22 Settings  10 Password  Parameter 2 Menu item number  0  first menu item  1   20 Other menu items  Parameter 3    Delete event message buffer    Delete alarm message buffer    51   Screen selection  Parameter 1 n 6  Cursor lock   O off 1 on   n 7  Screen number  1   99   Parameter 2 Entry number    0   99   Parameter 3 Field number    0   8     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    0   48  49       C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     52   Print screen  Parameter 1 Screen number  1  99  format  Byte  Parameters 2 3      53   Select recipe   Parameter 1 LB  Cursor inhibit  0  off  1  on   RB  Recipe number  1  99    Parameters 2 Data record number  1  99    Parameters 3 LB Entry number  
258. unting    Backward  Counting    Exceeding the  Threshold  Frequency    ZN    4 28    The counter calculates the value of the count from the count pulses  forwards  or backwards      You can assign parameters with the STEP 7 Function Hardware  configuration for     e Count pulse is triggered by a rising or falling edge at the corresponding  universal input    e Whether counting should be forwards or backwards    The counter calculates the actual value according to the following formula   Actual value  forward counter    number of edges  or    Actual value  backward counter    start value     number of edges    Forward counting starts at zero or continued from the last counter value and  until the selected comparison value is reached  The start value after resetting  the counter is always zero  The comparision value is set by the user program     Backward counting starts counting backwards from the selected start value or  is continued from the last counter value until the value zero has been  reached  Start values are set by the application program     The universal input counter counts count pulses up to a maximum frequency  of 10 kHz     A frequency filter is fitted to the inputs     Warning    If the actual frequency exceeds the threshold frequency of 10kHz  then the  correct function of the universal inputs can no longer be guaranteed  since  count pulses will be lost     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Stop and Start  Counters    Addressing  Parame
259. ur system  you must always assume the longest  response time     The shortest and longest response times will be considered below in order  that you can form a picture of the variation range of the response time     3 21    Control with the C7 CPU    Shortest Response Figure 3 3 illustrates the conditions for the shortest response time   Time    The state of the observed input changes  immediately before reading the PII  The  change to the input signal will still be consid   ered in the PII     Operating    system    The change to the input signal will be  processed here by the user program      eb              eb    U    C   O   Q   V        am    The response of the user program to the  change to the input signal is sent to the  outputs here     Operating  system       Figure 3 3 Shortest Response Time    C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  3 22 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Calculation    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Control with the C7 CPU    The  shortest  response time comprises the following       x process input image transfer time    1 x operating system run time       x program processing time     1 x process output image transfer time    Processing time for S7 timers    Delay of the inputs and outputs    The input delays are not marked in the diagram  Depending on the module   however  you have to take into account the following delay times     For digital inputs  input delay times  For digital outputs  negligible delay times  For analog inputs
260. ur within the programmable controller  Examples of such  errors include  Program errors or module failures  System errors can be  indicated via LEDs or via the STEP 7 tool S7 Information     A system function  SFC  is a     Function integrated in the operating system  of the CPU  which can be called in the STEP 7 user program if required     A system function block  SFB  is a     gt  Function Block integrated in the  operating system of the CPU  which can be called in the STEP 7 user  program if required     The system memory is a RAM integrated in the central processing unit  The  address areas  for example  timers  counters  memory marker bits  and data  areas required internally by the     Operating System  for example   communication buffer  are stored in the system memory     It reports internal states in the C7 and in the controller     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    Glossary 11    Glossary    T    Time of Day  Interrupt    Timers    Tool    Transfer Mode    U    User Memory    User Program    W    Work Memory   RAM     Glossary 12        Interrupt  Time of Day    Timers are component parts of the     gt  C7 CPU  Asynchronous to the user  program  the contents of the    timer cells    are automatically updated by the  operating system  By means of STEP 7 instructions the exact function of the  timer cell  for example  on delay  is determined and processing  for example   starting  initiated         STEP 7 Tool    Operating mode of the C7 used 
261. us   28 us   0 03 ms  Adding the process image transfer time  the  Operating system run time and the user program execution time yields the  time interval     0 2 ms   0 15 ms   0 87 ms   0 05 ms   1 5 ms   2 77 ms  This time  interval prolongs the execution time of the S7 timers     2 7 7 ms  10 ms       x 0 03 ms   0 04 ms    The cycle time is the sum of the times listed     Cycle time   0 2 ms   0 15 ms   0 87 ms   0 04 ms   1 5 ms   2 8 ms     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    3 27    Control with the C7 CPU    3 6 2 Calculation Example for the Response Time    Response Time    Example  Configuration  Parameters of the  CPU    Calculation    3 28    To recap  the response time is a total of      2 X process input image transfer time    2 X process output image transfer time    2 X operating system run time     2 X program execution time    Processing time for S7 timers      Input and output delay times    It is based on a C7 control system including I O     It is based on the data from the calculation example for the cycle time     The response time for the example is as follows     Processing time for S7 timer    1 T    Process image transfer time       Process input image  PII     2 0 2ms   0 4 ms       Process output image  PIQ     2 0 15ms   0 3 ms  Operating system run time       Cycle control    2 0 87ms   1 74 ms       Rack monitoring    2 0 05ms  ca  0 1 ms   User program execution time  1 5 ms   Ist subtotal  As a time basis for calculatin
262. user password level     Point of time at which the controller revokes a message     The backup buffer backs up memory areas of the C7 without the need for a  backup battery  The memory backs up a programmable number of timers   counters  memory marker bits and data bytes  the     retentive timers   counters  memory marker bits and data bytes     Data transmission rate  bit s      The C7 620 control system integrates an S7 300 CPU  a COROS OP  I O and  an IM 360 interface module in one single unit     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 CPU    C7 OP    C7 1 0    Code Block    Coming  Message     Communications  Processor    Complete Restart    Compress    Configuration    Configuration  Memory    Glossary    The C7 CPU 1s a central processing unit of the C7 range  complete with  processor  arithmetic unit  memory  operating system and interfaces for  programming devices  The C7 CPU is independent of the     gt  C7 OP  The C7  CPU has its own MPI address and is connected to the C7 OP via the MPI   multipoint interface      The C7 OP handles the OP functions of the C7 control system  It is  independent of the     gt  C7 CPU and continues to operate  for example  if the  C7 CPU enters the STOP mode  The C7 OP has its own MPI address and is  connected to the C7 CPU via this interface  It is via the MPI that the C7 OP  is connected to a configuring computer  programming device PC      The C7 I O       signal modules  forms the interface between the process an
263. vel   Parameters 2  3    24   Password logout  branching in message level   Parameters 1  2  3         C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C 10 C79000 G7076 C624 01    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued       No  Function    Print shift log  A  mestas  Print nproduction report  Parameters  1 2     Print alarm message buffer    Parameter 1 0  Print chronologically  1  Print together    Parameters 2  3      Print event message buffer    Parameter 1 0  Print chronologically  1  Print together    Parameters 2  3      Overflow warning for event messages on off    Parameter 1 0  Off  1  On    Parameters 2  3    Overflow warning for alarm messages on off    Parameter 1    Parameters 2  3    Transfer date time to C7 CPU    If this job is submitted too often  the C7 can get overloaded  as two transfers per  job are necessary     Fetch LED area from C7 CPU  Parameter 1 Block numbers    Parameters 2  3      Fetch C7 CPU event message bit area    Parameter 1 Block numbers    Parameters 2  3      Fetch C7 CPU alarm message bit area  Parameter 1 Block numbers    Parameters 2  3      Fetch C7 CPU acknowledgement area  Parameter 1 Block numbers    Parameters 2  3         C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 C 11    C7 OP Functionality Standard Screens Control Jobs System Messages    Table C 2 Control Jobs with Parameters  Continued     47 Fetch LED area from C7 CPU  Parameter 1 LED image  Area n
264. versal inputs 1   3 can be assigned as   e Count input  e Period time counter  input 3 only   e Frequency meter  input 3 only     The counter values are made available to the application program as 16 bit  values and the frequency and period time counter as 24 bit values     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 24 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    Table 4 18 lists the parameters for the above mentioned functions     Table 4 18 Parameter Block of the Count Inputs  Explanation Value Range Default Setting  Count input 1 Define the count direction Forwards Forwards  Backwards  Select count edge to be used for counting Rising Rising  Negative  Counter can trigger a process alarm after reaching Yes No  the comparison value  when connting up  or zero No  transition  when counting down   Count input 2 Define the count direction Forwards Forwards  Backwards  Select count edge to be used for counting Rising Rising  Negative    Counter can trigger a process alarm after reaching  the comparison value  when connting up  or zero  transition  when counting down     Count input 3 Activate the count input and assignment of the Deactivated Deactivated  counting type Counter  Frequency counter  Period time counter    If counter activated then define the count Forwards Forwards  Backwards   If counter activated then define the edge to be used Rising Rising   for counting Falling    If counter activated  then the counter can trigger a  pr
265. ware Manual     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  4 4 C79000 G7076 C624 01    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 2 Addressing the C7 I O    Overview The following section describes the addressing of the digital I O  You require  this information to be able to address the channels for the digital inputs and  outputs in the application program     Figure 4 2 shows the scheme for addressing the individual channels of the  digital I O        Digital inputs Bottom view of C7        Address 0 0      Address 0 1 Byte address             Digital in  outputs  Start address  Byte 0        Address 0 7            Address 1 0       Address 1 1  Byte address   Digital in  outputs  Start address  Byte 1              Address 1 7           Bit address    Digital outputs       Pin number  Inputs marked with this    hatching are not relevant to  this example                   Figure 4 2 Digital Input Output Addresses    C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01 4 5    Addressing  Parameter Assignment and Function of the C7 Input Output    4 3 Use and Function of C7 Analog I O    In this Section This section contains   e Descriptions of the basic terminology for analog value processing   e How to address and assign parameters to analog I O   e How you allocate measurement ranges to analog input channels     e The behavior of the individual analog input channels and the analog  output channel     4 3 1 Addressing Analog I O    Analog Function The ad
266. wledgment of alarm messages   e Message number   e Values of variables at the time of arrival or departure    The C7   s message buffer can store up to 256 events  Events are   e The arrival of a message   e The acknowledgment of a message  alarm messages only     e The departure of a message    During configuration you can define a residual buffer area  When this  residual buffer space has been reached  an automatic overflow warning is  issued  thatis EM residual buffer  This overflow warning is a system  message  Messages continue to be inserted into the buffer even after the  residual buffer space has been reached     A sub category of the event message is the standby message  The standby  message is the event message number 0  It appears on the display when the  C7 is operating at the message level and event or alarm messages are not  waiting  The standby message is stored in the firmware and contains the  version and the device type           SIMATIC C7 Vx xx    C7 623                      Figure 7 1 Standby Message C7 623    Depending on the configuration  the standby message can be represented by  other text  It can contain the date and time but not variables     C7 623  C7 624 Control Systems  C79000 G7076 C624 01    Standard O I Functions    7 1 2 Acknowledging and Suppressing Alarm Messages    Acknowledging  Alarm Messages    Acknowledgement  Groups    Suppressing  Alarm Messages    Activating the  Suppress Function    Alarm messages have to be acknowledged because 
267. xt time the C7  runs up     After alarm messages have been suppressed  they are no longer stored in the  alarm message buffer  They are stored in the alarm message buffer only from  the time that they first occur until the time that the display is suppressed     Note    The alarm message suppression function should be used only during the  commissioning phase of the C7     C7 623  C7   624 Control Systems    C79000 G7076 C624 01    7 5    Standard O I Functions    7 1 3 System Messages    Overview System messages indicate operating states within the C7  that is  they draw  your attention to malfunctions or a breakdown in communication     Display of System This type of message has top display priority  If a fault occurs with the C7   Messages the active event message or alarm message is removed from the display and a  system message is issued in its place     Serious and System messages are classified as either serious or non serious system  Non serious messages     System Messages e Serious system messages  This is based on a fault which can only be    rectified by a cold or warm restart of the C7     e Non serious system messages  All other errors generate non serious  system messages  that is when a print job has been initiated but a printer  is not connected to the C7  Display of a non serious system message can  also be canceled automatically when a specific  configurable display time  has expired     A list of possible system messages and their explanations can be found
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Kit miglioria, viva voce Bluetooth  iTEC CHARGER4 mobile device charger  Smeg PMO66A  BH-2065 User manual(PDF Format)  Samsung ML-4050N 用戶手冊  Samsung Samsung Galaxy Y mobiltelefon Felhasználói kézikönyv  Corone e ponti cementati con sistema a componenti    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file